2023 Mazda Cx-5 SUV When Driving User Manual

MY CAR USER MANUAL

When Driving for Your Mazda Cx-5 SUV 2023

When Driving  
4
Information concerning safer driving and stopping.  
Start/Stop Engine.............................. 4-4  
Ignition Switch............................. 4-4  
Starting the Engine....................... 4-5  
Turning the Engine Off...............4-10  
HomeLink Wireless Control System  
(Type A)*....................................4-87  
HomeLink Wireless Control System  
(Type B)*.................................... 4-91  
Instrument Cluster and Display............  
........................................................... 4-11  
Instrument Cluster and  
Brake................................................ 4-96  
Brake System..............................4-96  
AUTOHOLD............................4-100  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)........4-104  
Display........................................4-11  
Instrument Cluster (Type A).......4-12  
Instrument Cluster (Type B).......4-31  
Instrument Cluster (Type C).......4-47  
Active Driving Display*.............4-59  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction  
Assist...............................................4-106  
Antilock Brake System  
(ABS)........................................4-106  
Traction Control System  
(TCS)........................................ 4-107  
Dynamic Stability Control  
(DSC)........................................4-109  
Off-Road Traction Assist*........ 4-110  
Automatic Transaxle....................... 4-61  
Automatic Transaxle  
Controls...................................... 4-61  
Shift-Lock System......................4-62  
Transaxle Ranges........................4-62  
Manual Shift Mode.....................4-64  
Direct Mode*.............................. 4-70  
Driving Tips................................4-71  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-  
Drive).............................................. 4-112  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-  
Drive)........................................4-112  
Switches and Controls.....................4-72  
Lighting Control......................... 4-72  
Turn and Lane-Change  
i-ACTIV AWD............................... 4-115  
Signals........................................ 4-79  
Windshield Wipers and  
i-ACTIV AWD Operation*.......4-115  
Washer........................................ 4-80  
Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer........................................ 4-83  
Rear Window Defogger..............4-84  
Horn............................................4-86  
Hazard Warning Flasher............. 4-87  
Power Steering...............................4-117  
Power Steering..........................4-117  
i-ACTIVSENSE............................. 4-118  
i-ACTIVSENSE*......................4-118  
*Some models.  
4-1  
Radar Sensors (Rear)*..............4-267  
Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear)*.........4-269  
Front Camera/Side Cameras/Rear  
Camera*.................................... 4-270  
Adaptive Front Lighting System  
(AFS)*...................................... 4-121  
High Beam Control System  
(HBC)*......................................4-122  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)* .........  
.................................................. 4-125  
Traffic Sign Recognition System  
(TSR)*...................................... 4-130  
Distance Recognition Support  
Cruise Control............................... 4-271  
Cruise Control*.........................4-271  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System.............................................4-276  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (DRSS)*.......................4-136  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)*..........  
.................................................. 4-140  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)* .....  
.................................................. 4-142  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)*...............4-146  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)*.........4-161  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)*.................................. 4-177  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support  
(Advanced SCBS)*...................4-191  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward]  
(SCBS F)*.................................4-194  
Smart City Brake Support [Reverse]  
(SCBS R)*................................ 4-198  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)*....4-202  
360° View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))*................................ 4-204  
360° View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type B))*.................................4-231  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)* ......  
.................................................. 4-259  
Radar Sensor (Front)*.............. 4-264  
System...................................... 4-276  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))........................................ 4-280  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))*................................ 4-280  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type B)).........................................4-288  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect  
(Type B))*.................................4-288  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda  
Connect (Type A)).........................4-296  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))*..................4-296  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda  
Connect (Type B))......................... 4-305  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda  
Connect (Type B))*.................. 4-305  
*Some models.  
4-2  
MEMO  
4-3  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
Ignition Switch  
WARNING  
Push Button Start Positions  
▼
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
switch the ignition off, set the parking  
brake, and make sure the selector lever is in  
P position:  
Leaving the driver's seat without switching  
the ignition off, setting the parking brake,  
and shifting the selector lever to P position  
is dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur which could result  
in an accident.  
The system operates only when the key is  
within operational range.  
Each time the push button start is pressed,  
the ignition switches in the order of off,  
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button  
start again from ON switches the ignition  
off.  
In addition, if your intention is to leave the  
vehicle for even a short period, it is  
important to switch the ignition off, as  
leaving it in another position will disable  
some of the vehicle's security systems and  
run the battery down.  
Indicator light  
ACC (Accessory)  
Push button start  
Some electrical accessories will operate  
and the indicator light (amber) illuminates.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The engine starts by pressing the push  
The keyless entry system does not function  
while the push button start has been  
pressed to ACC, and the doors will not  
lock/unlock even if they have been locked  
manually.  
button start while depressing the brake  
pedal. To switch the ignition position,  
press the push button start without  
depressing the pedal.  
Do not leave the ignition switched ON  
while the engine is not running. Doing  
so could result in the battery going  
dead. If the selector lever is in the P  
position, and the ignition is in ACC, the  
ignition switches off automatically after  
about 25 minutes.  
ON  
This is the normal running position after  
the engine is started. The indicator light  
(amber) turns off. (The indicator light  
(amber) illuminates when the ignition is  
switched ON and the engine is not  
running.)  
Off  
Some indicator lights/warning lights  
should be inspected before the engine is  
started (page 4-11).  
The power supply to electrical devices  
turns off and the push button start  
indicator light (amber) also turns off.  
4-4  
 
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
NOTE  
Starting the Engine  
When the push button start is pressed to  
ON, the sound of the fuel pump motor  
operating near the fuel tank can be heard.  
This does not indicate an abnormality.  
WARNING  
Radio waves from the key may affect  
medical devices such as pacemakers:  
Before using the key near people who use  
medical devices, ask the medical device  
manufacturer or your physician if radio  
waves from the key will affect the device.  
NOTE  
The key must be carried because the key  
carries an immobilizer chip that must  
communicate with the engine controls at  
short range.  
The engine can be started when the push  
button start is pressed from off, ACC, or  
ON.  
The push button start system functions  
(function which can start the engine by  
only carrying the key) can be  
deactivated to prevent any possible  
adverse effect on a user wearing a  
pacemaker or other medical device. If  
the system is deactivated, you will be  
unable to start the engine by carrying  
the key. Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for details. If the push button  
start system functions have been  
deactivated, you can start the engine by  
following the procedure indicated when  
the key battery goes dead.  
Refer to Engine Start Function When  
Key Battery is Dead on page 4-8.  
4-5  
 
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
After starting a cold engine, the engine  
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light  
(green) (if equipped) in the instrument  
cluster and the push button start  
speed increases and a whining sound  
from the engine compartment can be  
heard.  
indicator light (green) illuminate.  
This is for improved exhaust gas  
purification and does not indicate any  
parts defect.  
Engine-starting is controlled by the  
spark ignition system.  
This system meets all Canadian  
Interference-Causing Equipment  
Standard requirements regulating the  
impulse electrical field strength of radio  
noise.  
Indicator light  
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.  
2. Occupants should fasten their seat  
belts.  
Push button start  
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.  
4. Continue to press the brake pedal  
firmly until the engine has completely  
started.  
5. Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must  
restart the engine while the vehicle is  
moving, shift into neutral (N).  
NOTE  
If the push button start indicator  
light (green) flashes, make sure that  
the key is being carried (for vehicles  
with a type A/type B instrument  
cluster (page 7-22), messages are  
displayed in the instrument cluster).  
If the push button start indicator  
NOTE  
The starter will not operate if the  
selector lever is not in P or N position  
and the brake pedal is not depressed  
sufficiently.  
light (green) flashes with the key  
being carried, touch the key to the  
push button start and start the  
engine (for vehicles with a type A/  
type B instrument cluster (page  
7-22), messages are displayed in  
the instrument cluster). Refer to  
Engine Start Function When Key  
Battery is Dead on page 4-8.  
4-6  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
(Forced engine starting method)  
If the KEY warning light (red)  
illuminates, or the push button start  
indicator light (amber) flashes, this  
could indicate that the engine may  
not start using the usual starting  
method (for vehicles with a type A/  
type B instrument cluster (page  
7-22), messages are displayed in  
the instrument cluster). Have your  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. If  
this occurs, the engine can be  
force-started. Press and hold the  
push button start until the engine  
starts. Other procedures necessary  
for starting the engine, such as  
having the key in the cabin, and  
depressing the brake pedal are  
required.  
CAUTION  
If the KEY warning light (red)  
illuminates, or the push button start  
indicator light (amber) flashes, this  
could indicate a problem with the  
engine starting system. This may  
prevent the engine from starting or  
from switching the ignition to ACC or  
ON (for vehicles with a type A/type B  
instrument cluster (page 7-22),  
messages are displayed in the  
instrument cluster). Have your vehicle  
inspected at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the  
KEY warning light (red) flashes after  
the push button start is pressed. This  
informs the driver that the push  
button start will not switch to ACC,  
even if it is pressed from off (for  
vehicles with a type A/type B  
instrument cluster (page 7-22),  
messages are displayed in the  
instrument cluster).  
When the engine is force-started, the  
KEY warning light (red) (if  
equipped) remains illuminated and  
the push button start indicator light  
(amber) remains flashing.  
When the selector lever is in the  
neutral (N) position, the KEY  
indicator light (green) (if equipped)  
and the push button start indicator  
light (green) do not illuminate.  
The key battery is dead.  
The key is out of operational  
7. Press the push button start after both  
the KEY indicator light (green) (if  
equipped) in the instrument cluster and  
the push button start indicator light  
(green) illuminate.  
range.  
The key is placed in areas where it  
is difficult for the system to detect  
the signal (page 3-8).  
A key from another manufacturer  
similar to the key is in the  
operational range.  
4-7  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
NOTE  
Engine Start Function When Key  
Battery is Dead  
▼
After starting the engine, the push  
button start indicator light (amber)  
turns off and the ignition switches to  
the ON position.  
CAUTION  
After pressing the push button start  
When starting the engine by holding the  
transmitter over the push button start due  
to a dead key battery or a malfunctioning  
key, be careful not to allow the following,  
otherwise the signal from the key will not  
be received correctly and the engine may  
not start.  
and before the engine starts, the  
operation sound of the fuel pump  
motor from near the fuel tank can be  
heard, however, this does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for  
about 10 seconds.  
Metal parts of other keys or metal objects  
touch the key.  
NOTE  
Do not use high engine speeds until  
reaching the operating temperature.  
Whether the engine is cold or warm,  
it should be started without the use  
of the accelerator.  
If the engine does not start the first  
time, refer to Starting a Flooded  
Engine under Emergency Starting. If  
the engine still does not start, have  
your vehicle inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page  
7-16).  
Spare keys or keys for other vehicles  
equipped with an immobilizer system  
touch or come near the key.  
Devices for electronic purchases, or  
security passage touch or come near the  
key.  
If the engine cannot be started due to a  
dead key battery, the engine can be started  
using the following procedure:  
1. Continue to depress the brake pedal  
firmly until the engine has completely  
started.  
2. Make sure that the push button start  
indication light (green) flashes.  
4-8  
 
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
3. Align the center area of the emblem on  
the transmitter with the center area of  
the push button start while the push  
button start indicator light (green)  
flashes.  
To switch the ignition position  
without starting the engine, perform  
the following operations after the  
push button start indicator light  
(green) turns on.  
1. Release the brake pedal.  
2. Press the push button start to  
switch the ignition position. The  
ignition switches in the order of  
ACC, ON, and off each time the  
push button start is pressed. To  
switch the ignition position  
again, perform the operation  
from the beginning.  
Indicator light  
Emblem  
Key  
Emergency Operation for Starting  
the Engine  
▼
Push button start  
4. Make sure that the push button start  
indicator light (green) turns on.  
5. Press the push button start to start the  
engine.  
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,  
or the push button start indicator light  
(amber) flashes, this could indicate that  
the engine may not start using the usual  
starting method (for vehicles with a type  
A/type B instrument cluster (page 7-22),  
messages are displayed in the instrument  
cluster). Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible. If this occurs, the engine can be  
force-started. Press and hold the push  
button start until the engine starts. Other  
procedures necessary for starting the  
engine such as having the key in the cabin,  
and depressing the brake pedal are  
required.  
NOTE  
The engine cannot be started unless  
the brake pedal is fully depressed.  
If there is a malfunction with the  
push button start function, the push  
button start indicator light (amber)  
flashes. In this case, the engine may  
start, however, have the vehicle  
checked at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
If the push button start indicator  
light (green) does not illuminate,  
perform the operation from the  
beginning again. If it does not  
illuminate, have the vehicle checked  
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
4-9  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
(Vehicle equipped with Type A/B  
instrument cluster)  
Turning the Engine Off  
A message is indicated in the display of  
the instrument cluster.  
(Vehicle equipped with Type C  
instrument cluster)  
The KEY indicator light (green) flashes  
for approximately 30 seconds.  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
If the engine is turned off while the  
selector lever is in a position other than  
P, the ignition switches to ACC.  
WARNING  
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is  
moving:  
Stopping the engine while the vehicle is  
moving for any reason other than in an  
emergency is dangerous. Stopping the  
engine while the vehicle is moving will  
result in reduced braking ability due to the  
loss of power braking, which could cause  
an accident and serious injury.  
Emergency Engine Stop  
▼
Continuously pressing the push button  
start or quickly pressing it any number of  
times while the engine is running or the  
vehicle is being driven will turn the engine  
off immediately. The ignition switches to  
ACC.  
1. Stop the vehicle completely.  
2. Shift the selector lever to the P  
position and set the parking brake.  
3. Press the push button start to turn off  
the engine. The ignition position is off.  
CAUTION  
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the  
push button start is off.  
NOTE  
The cooling fan in the engine  
compartment could turn on for a few  
minutes after the ignition is switched  
from ON to OFF, whether or not the A/C  
is on or off, to cool the engine  
compartment quickly.  
If the system detects that the remaining  
battery power of the key is low when the  
ignition is switched from ON to ACC or  
OFF, the following is indicated.  
Replace with a new battery before the  
key becomes unusable.  
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on  
page 6-33.  
4-10  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster  
Type A  
Type B  
Type C  
Active Driving Display  
① Instrument Cluster (Type A)................................................................................. page 4-12  
② Instrument Cluster (Type B)..................................................................................page 4-31  
③ Instrument Cluster (Type C)..................................................................................page 4-47  
④ Active Driving Display......................................................................................... page 4-59  
4-11  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
① Speedometer..........................................................................................................page 4-12  
② Tachometer............................................................................................................page 4-12  
③ Multi-information Display (Type A).....................................................................page 4-14  
④ Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..................................................................... page 4-17  
⑤ Fuel Gauge............................................................................................................ page 4-18  
⑥ Dashboard Illumination.........................................................................................page 4-18  
⑦ Speed Unit Selector...............................................................................................page 4-19  
Free/Open Source Software Information  
This product includes free/open sources. Information about the licensing and source code is  
available at the following URL.  
https://www.nippon-seiki.co.jp/business_ic_meter/  
This may cause severe engine damage.  
Speedometer  
▼
The speedometer indicates the speed of the  
vehicle.  
1
1
*
*
STRIPED ZONE RED ZONE  
Tachometer  
▼
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).  
CAUTION  
1 The range varies depending on the type  
*
of gauge.  
Do not run the engine with the tachometer  
needle in the RED ZONE.  
4-12  
     
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
NOTE  
When the tachometer needle enters the  
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the  
driver that the gears should be shifted  
before entering the RED ZONE.  
4-13  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Multi-information Display (Type A)  
▼
Dashboard illumination knob  
INFO switch  
Multi-information Display (Type A)  
The multi-information display indicates the following information.  
Speedometer  
Odometer  
Trip meter  
Outside temperature  
Distance-to-empty  
Average fuel economy  
Current fuel economy  
Maintenance Monitor  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive) Display  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Display  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR) Display  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) Display  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
System Display  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Display  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Display  
Cruise Control Display  
Compass Display  
Door-Ajar/Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication  
Message Display  
4-14  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The screen content changes each time the INFO switch is pressed.  
Press the INFO switch  
*1  
Basic display  
*2  
Warning message  
display  
Press the INFO switch  
Press the INFO switch  
Compass display  
Trip Meter A display  
Press the INFO switch  
Press the INFO switch  
Trip Meter B display  
Maintenance Monitor  
display  
Press the INFO switch  
i-ACTIVSENSE display  
Press the INFO switch  
*1: Displayed when opening/closing door/trunk lid.  
*2: Displayed only when a warning occurs.  
4-15  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The screen content changes each time the dashboard illumination knob is pressed and held.  
Gauge indication  
Press and hold dashboard  
illumination knob  
Press and hold  
dashboard illumination  
Numerical indication  
knob  
Press and hold dashboard  
illumination knob  
Display off  
4-16  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
For instance, trip meter A can record the  
distance from the point of origin, and trip  
meter B can record the distance from  
where the fuel tank is filled.  
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
Meter Selector  
▼
The odometer is constantly displayed on  
the screen when the ignition is switched  
ON, and the TRIP A or TRIP B screen can  
be displayed by operating the INFO  
switch.  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
INFO switch  
The trip meter and average fuel economy  
can be reset by pressing the INFO switch  
for 1.5 seconds or more while in each  
mode.  
NOTE  
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
Trip Meter A  
display  
kilometers (miles).  
The trip record will be erased when:  
The power supply is interrupted  
(blown fuse or the battery is  
disconnected).  
The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km  
Press the INFO switch  
(mile).  
Trip Meter B  
display  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
▼
Displays the engine coolant temperature.  
The blue range of the gauge indicates that  
the engine coolant temperature is low, and  
the red range of the gauge indicates that  
the engine coolant temperature is high and  
overheating.  
Odometer  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
Trip meter  
The driving distance for a specified  
interval is indicated. Two types (TRIP A,  
TRIP B) of interval distance and the  
average fuel economy for each can be  
measured.  
4-17  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or  
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as  
possible.  
If inconsistency in engine performance or  
stalling occurs due to low fuel level  
conditions, refuel the vehicle as soon as  
possible and add at least 10 L (2.7 US gal,  
2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.  
CAUTION  
If the engine coolant temperature gauge needle is  
in the red range, there is the possibility of  
overheating. Drive slowly to reduce engine load  
until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle  
and wait for the engine to cool down.  
Refer to Overheating on page 7-17.  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(SKYACTIV-G 2.5T)  
After refueling, it may require some time  
for the indicator to stabilize. In addition,  
the indicator may deviate while driving  
on a slope or curve since the fuel moves  
in the tank.  
If the engine coolant temperature is high  
or the engine is hot, the engine output  
may be limited.  
Fuel Gauge  
The direction of the arrow ( ) indicates  
▼
that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side  
of the vehicle.  
The fuel gauge shows approximately how  
much fuel is remaining in the tank when  
the ignition is switched ON. We  
Dashboard Illumination  
▼
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
However, when the light sensor detects  
that the surrounding area is bright such as  
when the lights are turned on in the  
daytime, the dashboard illumination does  
not dim.  
Full  
1/4 Full  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched ON in the  
early evening or at dusk, the dashboard  
illumination is dimmed for several  
seconds until the light sensor detects the  
brightness of the surrounding area,  
however, the dimming may cancel after  
the brightness is detected.  
Empty  
When the lights are turned on, the  
lights-on indicator light in the  
instrument cluster turns on.  
Refer to Headlights on page 4-72.  
4-18  
   
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The brightness of the instrument cluster  
and dashboard illuminations can be  
adjusted by rotating the knob.  
Speed Unit Selector  
▼
In some countries, you may have to  
change the speed units between km/h and  
mph.  
The brightness decreases by rotating the  
knob to the left. A beep sound will be  
heard when the knob has been rotated to  
the maximum dim position.  
When pressing the dashboard illumination  
knob, the speed units in the instrument  
cluster will change.  
The brightness increases by rotating the  
knob to the right.  
Dashboard illumination knob  
Dim  
Bright  
Outside Temperature Display  
▼
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
outside temperature is displayed.  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
The illumination dimmer can be canceled  
by rotating the dashboard illumination  
knob to the right until a beep sound is  
heard while the instrument cluster is  
dimmed with the ignition switched ON. If  
the instrument cluster's visibility is  
reduced due to glare from surrounding  
brightness, cancel the illumination  
dimmer.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the  
outside temperature display may differ  
from the actual outside temperature  
depending on the surroundings and  
vehicle conditions:  
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.  
Sudden changes in outside  
NOTE  
temperature.  
The vehicle is parked.  
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the instrument cluster cannot  
be dimmed even if the lights are turned  
on.  
Changing the Temperature Unit of the  
Outside Temperature Display  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the screen in the center  
display switches to constant display of  
the daytime screen.  
The outside temperature unit can be  
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit.  
4-19  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Settings can be changed by operating the  
center display screen.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
If there is no past fuel economy  
information such as after first  
purchasing your vehicle or the  
information is deleted when the battery  
cables are disconnected, the actual  
distance-to empty/range may differ from  
the amount indicated.  
Distance-to-empty  
▼
This displays the approximate distance  
you can travel on the remaining fuel based  
on the fuel economy.  
Average Fuel Economy  
▼
The distance-to-empty will be calculated  
and displayed every second.  
The average fuel economy is calculated  
every minute from the total traveled  
distance on the trip meter and the total fuel  
consumption, and the average fuel  
economy for either TRIP A or TRIP B is  
displayed.  
NOTE  
The average fuel economy and trip meters  
can be reset by pressing the INFO switch  
for 1.5 seconds or more while in each  
mode. After the data is cleared, the fuel  
consumption is recalculated and the - - -  
km/L (- - - mpg) for the 1 minute prior to  
it being displayed is indicated.  
Even though the distance-to-empty  
display may indicate a sufficient amount  
of remaining driving distance before  
refueling is required, refuel as soon as  
possible if the fuel level is very low or  
the low fuel warning light illuminates.  
The display will not change unless you  
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3  
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.  
The distance-to-empty is the  
approximate remaining distance the  
vehicle can be driven until all the  
graduation marks in the fuel gauge  
indicating the remaining fuel supply  
disappear.  
4-20  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))/Information (Mazda Connect  
(Type B)) section in the Mazda Connect  
Owner's Manual.  
Current Fuel Economy  
▼
This displays the current fuel economy by  
calculating the amount of fuel  
consumption and the distance traveled.  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select  
(Mi-Drive) Display  
▼
The display changes depending on the  
driving mode.  
Sport mode  
NOTE  
Indicates the 0 position when the vehicle  
speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or slower.  
The arrow on the scale indicates the  
average fuel economy.  
Off-road mode  
Maintenance Monitor  
▼
The following maintenance period  
notifications can be displayed by turning  
the Maintenance Monitor on.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Tire Rotation  
Oil Change  
When the remaining days to the  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Display  
▼
maintenance period is 15 days or less, or  
the remaining distance is 1,000 km (600  
miles) or shorter, a message is indicated  
when the ignition is switched ON.  
Displays the system status.  
For the setting method and indications for  
the maintenance monitor, refer to the  
Maintenance Monitor.  
4-21  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Display*  
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on  
page 4-125.  
▼
Displays the currently set system status.  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Display*  
▼
Displays the system status.  
Refer to Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) on page  
4-161.  
Distance Recognition Support  
System (DRSS) Display*  
▼
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
& Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) on page 4-177.  
Displays the distance between your  
vehicle and the vehicle ahead.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) Display*  
▼
Displays the currently set system status.  
Refer to Distance Recognition Support  
System (DRSS) on page 4-136.  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop &  
Go function) on page 4-146.  
*Some models.  
4-22  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed  
Display*  
Message Display  
▼
▼
A message such as the system operation  
status, a malfunction, or an abnormality is  
indicated.  
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise  
control is displayed.  
Warning/indicator light in instrument  
cluster turns on/flashes or symbol is  
indicated on display at same time as  
message  
Check the information regarding the  
warning/indicator light or indicated  
symbol.  
Refer to If a Warning Indication/Warning  
Lights on page 4-24.  
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-271.  
Refer to If a Indication/Indicator Lights on  
page 4-26.  
Compass Display  
▼
The direction the vehicle is moving is  
displayed in one of eight directions while  
the vehicle is being driven.  
Message only is indicated on display  
Follow the instructions indicated on the  
display. For the display content, refer to  
the next page.  
Refer to If a Message Indicated on  
Multi-information Display on page 7-37.  
Display  
N
Direction  
North  
S
South  
E
East  
W
West  
NE  
NW  
SE  
Northeast  
Northwest  
Southeast  
Southwest  
SW  
*Some models.  
4-23  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
▼
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and specifications.  
Instrument Cluster  
Center of Dashboard  
Warning lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas  
Warning Indication/Warning Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1*2  
7-22  
Brake System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Electronic Brake  
Force Distribu‐  
tion System  
Warning  
*1  
ABS Warning Light  
7-22  
ABS warning  
7-25  
*1  
7-22  
7-22  
Charging System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Engine Oil Warning Light  
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Indication  
Power Steering Malfunction Indication  
7-22  
7-22  
Master Warning Indication/Warning Light  
7-25  
4-24  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1  
7-25  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
7-25  
Check Engine Light  
Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication  
7-25  
7-25  
*
AWD Warning Indication  
*1  
7-25  
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Flashing  
7-25  
*1  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  
Turns on  
7-31  
Amber  
7-25  
KEY Warning Indication  
White  
7-31  
(Amber/White)  
(Amber)  
*
*1  
7-25  
7-25  
7-25  
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Indication  
*
*
Driver Attention Alert (DAA) Warning Indication  
(Amber)  
(Amber)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
7-25  
& Go function) Warning Indication  
*
7-25  
7-25  
7-25  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Warning Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Warning Indication  
*1  
LED Headlight Warning Light  
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) Warning In‐  
7-31  
7-31  
7-31  
dication  
Low Fuel Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*Some models.  
4-25  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1  
7-31  
Engine Oil Level Warning Light  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Front seat)  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Rear seat)  
7-31  
7-31  
(Red)  
*
7-31  
7-31  
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication  
Door-Ajar Warning Indication  
Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication  
Door-Ajar Warning Light  
7-31  
7-31  
*
*
1
2
The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or  
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.  
Indication/Indicator Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Indicator  
Seat Belt Indicator Light (Rear seat)  
Page  
2-30  
(Green)  
*
*1  
2-72  
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light  
*1  
3-43  
4-29  
4-63  
Security Indicator Light  
Wrench Indication  
Shift Position Indication  
*Some models.  
4-26  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Lights-On Indication/Indicator Light  
Page  
4-72  
Headlight  
High-Low Beam  
4-76  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
Flashing the  
Headlights  
4-76  
Turn and  
Lane-Change  
Signals  
4-79  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
Hazard Warning  
Flasher  
4-87  
*1  
4-102  
4-157  
4-176  
AUTOHOLD Active Indicator Light  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) indicator Light  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) indicator Light  
Traction Control  
System (TCS)  
4-107  
Dynamic Stabil‐  
ity Control  
(DSC)  
*1  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
4-109  
Turns on  
7-25  
*
*
*1  
4-107  
TCS OFF Indicator Light  
*1  
4-110  
4-112  
Off-Road Traction Assist Indicator Light  
Select Mode Indication  
*
4-123  
High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light  
(Green)  
Malfunction  
7-25  
*
*1  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light  
Except malfunc‐  
tion  
4-129  
*Some models.  
4-27  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
(White)  
(White)  
Indicator  
Page  
*
*
4-141  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA) Indication  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
4-151  
4-169  
4-151  
4-169  
4-179  
& Go function) Main Indication  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Main Indication  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) Set Indication  
(Green)  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Set Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
4-189  
*1  
(LDWS) OFF Indicator Light  
Advanced Smart  
City Brake Sup‐  
port (Advanced  
SCBS)  
4-193  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
[Forward]  
(SCBS F)  
4-196  
*
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Indication  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
[Reverse]  
(SCBS R)  
4-201  
*Some models.  
4-28  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Page  
Advanced Smart  
City Brake Sup‐  
port (Advanced  
SCBS)  
4-193  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
[Forward]  
(SCBS F)  
4-196  
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) OFF Indica‐  
*1  
tor Light  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
[Reverse]  
(SCBS R)  
4-201  
Smart Brake  
Support (SBS)  
System  
4-203  
*
4-272  
4-272  
Cruise Main Indication  
(White)  
(Green)  
*
Cruise Set Indication  
*
1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off  
a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains  
turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
When the engine oil replacement period  
has arrived.  
Wrench Indication  
▼
NOTE  
The wrench indication is displayed under  
the following conditions.  
The wrench indication may display  
earlier than the preset period depending  
on vehicle usage conditions.  
Whenever the engine oil is replaced, a  
reset of the vehicle engine control unit is  
necessary.  
When the preset maintenance period has  
arrived.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
*Some models.  
4-29  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-30  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
① Speedometer..........................................................................................................page 4-31  
② Tachometer............................................................................................................page 4-31  
③ Multi-information Display (Type B).....................................................................page 4-32  
④ Dashboard Illumination.........................................................................................page 4-36  
NOTE  
Speedometer  
▼
When the tachometer needle enters the  
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the  
driver that the gears should be shifted  
before entering the RED ZONE.  
The speedometer indicates the speed of the  
vehicle.  
Tachometer  
▼
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).  
CAUTION  
Do not run the engine with the tachometer  
needle in the RED ZONE.  
This may cause severe engine damage.  
1
*
STRIPED  
ZONE  
1
*
RED ZONE  
1 The range varies depending on the type  
*
of gauge.  
4-31  
     
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Multi-information Display (Type B)  
▼
INFO switch  
Multi-information Display (Type B)  
The multi-information display indicates the following information.  
Odometer  
Trip meter  
Engine coolant temperature gauge  
Fuel gauge  
Outside temperature  
Distance-to-empty  
Average fuel economy  
Current fuel economy  
Maintenance Monitor  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Display  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) Display  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
System Display  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Display  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Display  
Cruise Control Display  
Compass Display  
Message Display  
4-32  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The screen content changes each time the INFO switch is pressed.  
Press the INFO switch  
*1  
Warning message,  
Outside Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Current Fuel Economy,  
Trip Meter A, Average  
Fuel Economy, Outside  
Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Press the INFO switch  
Press the INFO switch  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature Gauge,  
Compass,  
Distance-to-empty,  
Outside Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Current Fuel Economy,  
Trip Meter B, Average  
Fuel Economy, Outside  
Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Press the INFO switch  
Press the INFO switch  
Engine Coolant  
i-ACTIVSENSE display,  
Outside Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Temperature Gauge,  
Maintenance Monitor,  
Outside Temperature,  
Odometer, Fuel Gauge  
Press the INFO switch  
*1: Displayed only when a warning occurs.  
4-33  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
meter B can record the distance from  
where the fuel tank is filled.  
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
Meter Selector  
▼
The odometer is constantly displayed on  
the screen when the ignition is switched  
ON, and the TRIP A or TRIP B screen can  
be displayed by operating the INFO  
switch.  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
The trip meter and average fuel economy  
can be reset by pressing the INFO switch  
for 1.5 seconds or more while in each  
mode.  
INFO switch  
NOTE  
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
kilometers (miles).  
The trip record will be erased when:  
Odometer,  
Trip meter A  
The power supply is interrupted  
(blown fuse or the battery is  
disconnected).  
The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km  
(mile).  
Press the INFO switch  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
▼
Odometer,  
Trip meter B  
Displays the engine coolant temperature.  
The blue range of the gauge indicates that  
the engine coolant temperature is low, and  
the red range of the gauge indicates that  
the engine coolant temperature is high and  
overheating.  
Odometer  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
Trip meter  
The driving distance for a specified  
interval is indicated. Two types (TRIP A,  
TRIP B) of interval distance and the  
average fuel economy for each can be  
measured.  
For instance, trip meter A can record the  
distance from the point of origin, and trip  
4-34  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
the ignition is switched ON. We  
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.  
CAUTION  
If the high engine coolant temperature  
warning light (red) flashes, there is a  
possibility of overheating. Drive slowly to  
reduce engine load until you can find a safe  
place to stop the vehicle and wait for the  
engine to cool down.  
Full  
Refer to Overheating on page 7-17.  
1/4 Full  
NOTE  
(SKYACTIV-G 2.5T)  
If the engine coolant temperature is high  
or the engine is hot, the engine output  
may be limited.  
The temperature unit (Centigrade/  
Empty  
Fahrenheit) of the engine coolant gauge  
display changes in conjunction with the  
temperature unit of the outside  
temperature display.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
If the fuel level is low, ( ) and ( ) turn an  
amber color. Refuel as soon as possible.  
If inconsistency in engine performance or  
stalling occurs due to low fuel level  
conditions, refuel the vehicle as soon as  
possible and add at least 10 L (2.7 US gal,  
2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.  
Fuel Gauge  
▼
The fuel gauge shows approximately how  
much fuel is remaining in the tank when  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
NOTE  
After refueling, it may require some time  
for the indicator to stabilize. In addition,  
the indicator may deviate while driving  
on a slope or curve since the fuel moves  
in the tank.  
The direction of the arrow ( ) indicates  
that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side  
of the vehicle.  
4-35  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The brightness increases by rotating the  
knob to the right.  
Dashboard Illumination  
▼
(Without auto-light control)  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
(With auto-light control)  
Dim  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
However, when the light sensor detects  
that the surrounding area is bright such as  
when the lights are turned on in the  
daytime, the dashboard illumination does  
not dim.  
Bright  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
The illumination dimmer can be canceled  
by rotating the dashboard illumination  
knob to the right until a beep sound is  
heard while the instrument cluster is  
dimmed with the ignition switched ON. If  
the instrument cluster's visibility is  
reduced due to glare from surrounding  
brightness, cancel the illumination  
dimmer.  
NOTE  
(With auto-light control)  
When the ignition is switched ON in the  
early evening or at dusk, the dashboard  
illumination is dimmed for several  
seconds until the light sensor detects the  
brightness of the surrounding area,  
however, the dimming may cancel after  
the brightness is detected.  
NOTE  
When the lights are turned on, the  
The illumination dimmer can be  
canceled by pressing the dashboard  
illumination knob.  
lights-on indicator light in the  
instrument cluster turns on.  
Refer to Headlights on page 4-72.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the instrument cluster cannot  
be dimmed even if the lights are turned  
on.  
The brightness of the instrument cluster  
and dashboard illuminations can be  
adjusted by rotating the knob.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
The brightness decreases by rotating the  
canceled, the screen in the center  
display switches to constant display of  
the daytime screen.  
knob to the left. A beep sound will be  
heard when the knob has been rotated to  
the maximum dim position.  
4-36  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Outside Temperature Display  
Distance-to-empty  
▼
▼
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
outside temperature is displayed.  
This displays the approximate distance  
you can travel on the remaining fuel based  
on the fuel economy.  
The distance-to-empty will be calculated  
and displayed every second.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the  
outside temperature display may differ  
from the actual outside temperature  
depending on the surroundings and  
vehicle conditions:  
NOTE  
Even though the distance-to-empty  
display may indicate a sufficient amount  
of remaining driving distance before  
refueling is required, refuel as soon as  
possible if the fuel level is very low or  
the low fuel warning light illuminates.  
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.  
Sudden changes in outside  
temperature.  
The vehicle is parked.  
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.  
The display will not change unless you  
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3  
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.  
The distance-to-empty is the  
approximate remaining distance the  
vehicle can be driven until all the  
graduation marks in the fuel gauge  
indicating the remaining fuel supply  
disappear.  
Changing the Temperature Unit of the  
Outside Temperature Display  
The outside temperature unit can be  
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit.  
Settings can be changed by operating the  
center display screen.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
If there is no past fuel economy  
information such as after first  
purchasing your vehicle or the  
information is deleted when the battery  
cables are disconnected, the actual  
distance-to empty/range may differ from  
the amount indicated.  
NOTE  
When the temperature unit indicated in the  
outside temperature display is changed,  
the temperature unit indicated in the  
engine coolant gauge display changes in  
conjunction with it.  
4-37  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Average Fuel Economy  
Maintenance Monitor  
▼
▼
The average fuel economy is calculated  
every minute from the total traveled  
distance on the trip meter and the total fuel  
consumption, and the average fuel  
economy for either TRIP A or TRIP B is  
displayed.  
The following maintenance period  
notifications can be displayed by turning  
the Maintenance Monitor on.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Tire Rotation  
Oil Change  
When the remaining days to the  
maintenance period is 15 days or less, or  
the remaining distance is 1,000 km (600  
miles) or shorter, a message is indicated  
when the ignition is switched ON.  
The average fuel economy and trip meters  
can be reset by pressing the INFO switch  
for 1.5 seconds or more while in each  
mode. After the data is cleared, the fuel  
consumption is recalculated and the - - -  
km/L (- - - mpg) for the 1 minute prior to  
it being displayed is indicated.  
For the setting method and indications for  
the maintenance monitor, refer to the  
Maintenance Monitor.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))/Information (Mazda Connect  
(Type B)) section in the Mazda Connect  
Owner's Manual.  
Current Fuel Economy  
▼
This displays the current fuel economy by  
calculating the amount of fuel  
consumption and the distance traveled.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Display*  
▼
Displays the system status.  
NOTE  
Indicates the 0 position when the vehicle  
speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or slower.  
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on  
page 4-125.  
*Some models.  
4-38  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Display*  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Display*  
▼
▼
Displays the currently set system status.  
Displays the system status.  
Refer to Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) on page  
4-161.  
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
& Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) on page 4-177.  
Distance Recognition Support  
System (DRSS) Display*  
▼
Displays the distance between your  
vehicle and the vehicle ahead.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) Display*  
▼
Displays the currently set system status.  
Refer to Distance Recognition Support  
System (DRSS) on page 4-136.  
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed  
Display*  
▼
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop &  
Go function) on page 4-146.  
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise  
control is displayed.  
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-271.  
*Some models.  
4-39  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Refer to If a Message Indicated on  
Compass Display  
▼
Multi-information Display on page 7-37.  
The direction the vehicle is moving is  
displayed in one of eight directions while  
the vehicle is being driven.  
Display  
N
Direction  
North  
S
South  
E
East  
W
West  
NE  
NW  
SE  
Northeast  
Northwest  
Southeast  
Southwest  
SW  
Message Display  
▼
A message such as the system operation  
status, a malfunction, or an abnormality is  
indicated.  
Warning/indicator light in instrument  
cluster turns on/flashes or symbol is  
indicated on display at same time as  
message  
Check the information regarding the  
warning/indicator light or indicated  
symbol.  
Refer to If a Warning Indication/Warning  
Lights on page 4-41.  
Refer to If a Indication/Indicator Lights on  
page 4-43.  
Message only is indicated on display  
Follow the instructions indicated on the  
display. For the display content, refer to  
the next page.  
4-40  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
▼
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and specifications.  
Instrument Cluster  
Center of Dashboard  
Warning lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas  
Warning Indication/Warning Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1*2  
7-22  
Brake System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Electronic Brake  
Force Distribu‐  
tion System  
Warning  
*1  
ABS Warning Light  
7-22  
ABS warning  
7-25  
*1  
7-22  
7-22  
Charging System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Engine Oil Warning Light  
*1  
7-22  
7-22  
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light  
(Red)  
Power Steering Malfunction Indication  
4-41  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
Master Warning Indication/Warning Light  
7-25  
*1  
7-25  
7-25  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Check Engine Light  
Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication  
7-25  
7-25  
*
AWD Warning Indication  
*1  
7-25  
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Flashing  
7-25  
*1  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  
Turns on  
7-31  
Amber  
7-25  
KEY Warning Indication  
White  
7-31  
(Amber/White)  
(Amber)  
*
*1  
7-25  
7-25  
7-25  
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*
*
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Indication  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) Warning Indication  
(Amber)  
*
7-25  
7-25  
7-25  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Warning Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Warning Indication  
*1  
LED Headlight Warning Light  
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) Warning In‐  
7-31  
7-31  
7-31  
dication  
Low Fuel Warning Indication  
*1  
Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*Some models.  
4-42  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1  
7-31  
Engine Oil Level Warning Light  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Front seat)  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Rear seat)  
7-31  
7-31  
(Red)  
*
7-31  
7-31  
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication  
Door-Ajar Warning Indication  
Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication  
7-31  
*
*
1
2
The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or  
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.  
Indication/Indicator Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Indicator  
Seat Belt Indicator Light (Rear seat)  
Page  
2-30  
(Green)  
*
*1  
2-72  
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light  
*1  
3-43  
4-46  
Security Indicator Light  
Wrench Indication  
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light  
4-46  
(Blue)  
*Some models.  
4-43  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Page  
Shift Position Indication  
4-63  
Lights-On Indication/Indicator Light  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
4-72  
Headlight  
High-Low Beam  
4-76  
Flashing the  
Headlights  
4-76  
Turn and  
Lane-Change  
Signals  
4-79  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
Hazard Warning  
Flasher  
4-87  
*1  
4-102  
4-157  
4-176  
AUTOHOLD Active Indicator Light  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) indicator Light  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) indicator Light  
Traction Control  
System (TCS)  
4-107  
Dynamic Stabili‐  
ty Control  
(DSC)  
*1  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
4-109  
Turns on  
7-25  
*
*
*1  
4-107  
TCS OFF Indicator Light  
*1  
4-110  
4-112  
Off-Road Traction Assist Indicator Light  
Select Mode Indication  
*
4-123  
High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light  
(Green)  
*Some models.  
4-44  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Page  
Malfunction  
7-25  
*
*
*1  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light  
Except malfunc‐  
tion  
4-129  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
4-151  
4-169  
4-151  
4-169  
4-179  
& Go function) Main Indication  
(White)  
(Green)  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Main Indication  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) Set Indication  
*
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Set Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS) Indication  
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System  
4-189  
*1  
(LDWS) OFF Indicator Light  
Advanced Smart  
City Brake Sup‐  
port (Advanced  
SCBS)  
*
4-193  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Indication  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
(SCBS)  
4-196  
Advanced Smart  
City Brake Sup‐  
port (Advanced  
SCBS)  
4-193  
Smart City  
Brake Support  
(SCBS)  
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) OFF Indica‐  
*1  
tor Light  
4-196  
Smart Brake  
Support (SBS)  
System  
4-203  
*
4-272  
Cruise Main Indication  
(White)  
*Some models.  
4-45  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Page  
*
4-272  
Cruise Set Indication  
(Green)  
*
1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off  
a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains  
turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Wrench Indication  
Low Engine Coolant Temperature  
Indicator Light (Blue)  
▼
▼
The wrench indication is displayed under  
the following conditions.  
The light illuminates continuously when  
the engine coolant temperature is low and  
turns off after the engine is warm.  
When the preset maintenance period has  
arrived.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the engine oil replacement period  
has arrived.  
NOTE  
The wrench indication may display  
earlier than the preset period depending  
on vehicle usage conditions.  
Whenever the engine oil is replaced, a  
reset of the vehicle engine control unit is  
necessary.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
*Some models.  
4-46  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster (Type C)  
① Speedometer..........................................................................................................page 4-47  
② Tachometer............................................................................................................page 4-47  
③ Multi-information Display (Type C).....................................................................page 4-48  
④ Dashboard Illumination.........................................................................................page 4-50  
NOTE  
Speedometer  
▼
When the tachometer needle enters the  
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the  
driver that the gears should be shifted  
before entering the RED ZONE.  
The speedometer indicates the speed of the  
vehicle.  
Tachometer  
▼
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).  
CAUTION  
Do not run the engine with the tachometer  
needle in the RED ZONE.  
This may cause severe engine damage.  
1
*
STRIPED  
ZONE  
1
*
RED ZONE  
1 The range varies depending on the type  
*
of gauge.  
4-47  
     
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Multi-information Display (Type C)  
▼
Multi-information Display (Type C)  
INFO switch  
The multi-information display indicates the following information.  
Odometer  
Trip meter  
Engine coolant temperature gauge  
Fuel gauge  
Outside temperature  
Trip Computer  
Cruise Control Display  
Compass Display  
Dashboard illumination knob  
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
Meter Selector  
▼
The display mode can be changed from  
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B  
and then back to odometer by pressing the  
selector while one of them is displayed.  
The selected mode will be displayed.  
Odometer  
Press the dashboard  
illumination knob  
Trip meter A  
Press the dashboard  
illumination knob  
Trip meter B  
Press the dashboard  
illumination knob  
4-48  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Odometer  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
Trip meter  
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
kilometers (miles).  
The trip record will be erased when:  
The trip meter can record the total distance  
of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter  
A, and the other is recorded in trip meter  
B.  
The power supply is interrupted  
(blown fuse or the battery is  
disconnected).  
The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km  
For instance, trip meter A can record the  
distance from the point of origin, and trip  
meter B can record the distance from  
where the fuel tank is filled.  
(mile).  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
▼
Displays the engine coolant temperature.  
The white range of the gauge indicates  
that the engine coolant temperature is low,  
and the red range of the gauge indicates  
that the engine coolant temperature is high  
and overheating.  
When trip meter A is selected, pressing the  
selector again within 1 second will change  
to trip meter B mode.  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
The trip meter records the total distance  
the vehicle is driven until the meter is  
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by  
depressing and holding the selector for 1  
second or more. Use this meter to measure  
trip distances and to compute fuel  
consumption.  
CAUTION  
If the engine coolant temperature gauge  
needle (white) flashes, there is a possibility  
of overheating. Drive slowly to reduce  
engine load until you can find a safe place  
to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine  
to cool down.  
NOTE  
If TRIP A is reset using the trip meter  
when the function which synchronizes  
(resets) the fuel economy monitor and  
the trip meter (TRIP A) is on, the fuel  
economy data resets in conjunction with  
TRIP A.  
Refer to Overheating on page 7-17.  
4-49  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
NOTE  
If inconsistency in engine performance or  
stalling occurs due to low fuel level  
conditions, refuel the vehicle as soon as  
possible and add at least 10 L (2.7 US gal,  
2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.  
(SKYACTIV-G 2.5T)  
If the engine coolant temperature is high  
or the engine is hot, the engine output  
may be limited.  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
The temperature unit (Centigrade/  
NOTE  
Fahrenheit) of the engine coolant gauge  
display changes in conjunction with the  
temperature unit of the outside  
temperature display.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
After refueling, it may require some time  
for the indicator to stabilize. In addition,  
the indicator may deviate while driving  
on a slope or curve since the fuel moves  
in the tank.  
The display indicating a quarter or less  
Fuel Gauge  
▼
remaining fuel has more segments to  
show the remaining fuel level in greater  
detail.  
The fuel gauge shows approximately how  
much fuel is remaining in the tank when  
the ignition is switched ON. We  
The direction of the arrow ( ) indicates  
that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side  
of the vehicle.  
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.  
Full  
Dashboard Illumination  
▼
(Without auto-light control)  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
(With auto-light control)  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
However, when the light sensor detects  
that the surrounding area is bright such as  
when the lights are turned on in the  
daytime, the dashboard illumination does  
not dim.  
1/4 Full  
Empty  
NOTE  
(With auto-light control)  
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or  
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as  
possible.  
4-50  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched ON in the  
early evening or at dusk, the dashboard  
illumination is dimmed for several  
seconds until the light sensor detects the  
brightness of the surrounding area,  
however, the dimming may cancel after  
the brightness is detected.  
When the lights are turned on, the  
lights-on indicator light in the  
instrument cluster turns on.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the instrument cluster cannot  
be dimmed even if the lights are turned  
on.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the screen in the center  
display switches to constant display of  
the daytime screen.  
Outside Temperature Display  
Refer to Headlights on page 4-72.  
▼
The brightness of the instrument cluster  
and dashboard illuminations can be  
adjusted by rotating the knob.  
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
outside temperature is displayed.  
The brightness decreases by rotating the  
knob to the left. A beep sound will be  
heard when the knob has been rotated to  
the maximum dim position.  
The brightness increases by rotating the  
knob to the right.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the  
outside temperature display may differ  
from the actual outside temperature  
depending on the surroundings and  
vehicle conditions:  
Dim  
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.  
Sudden changes in outside  
temperature.  
The vehicle is parked.  
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.  
Bright  
Changing the Temperature Unit of the  
Outside Temperature Display  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
The outside temperature unit can be  
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit.  
Settings can be changed by operating the  
center display screen.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
The illumination dimmer can be canceled  
by rotating the dashboard illumination  
knob to the right until a beep sound is  
heard while the instrument cluster is  
dimmed with the ignition switched ON. If  
the instrument cluster's visibility is  
reduced due to glare from surrounding  
brightness, cancel the illumination  
dimmer.  
4-51  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
NOTE  
The display may not change unless you  
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3  
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.  
When the temperature unit indicated in the  
outside temperature display is changed,  
the temperature unit indicated in the  
engine coolant gauge display changes in  
conjunction with it.  
The distance-to-empty is the  
approximate remaining distance the  
vehicle can be driven until all the  
graduation marks in the fuel gauge  
(indicating the remaining fuel supply)  
disappear.  
If there is no past fuel economy  
information such as after first  
purchasing your vehicle or the  
information is deleted when the battery  
cables are disconnected, the actual  
distance-to empty/range may differ from  
the amount indicated.  
Trip Computer  
▼
The following information can be selected  
by pressing the INFO switch with the  
ignition switched ON.  
Distance-to-empty mode  
Average fuel economy mode  
Current fuel economy mode  
Compass mode  
If you have any problems with your trip  
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Average fuel economy mode  
This mode displays the average fuel  
economy by calculating the total traveled  
distance and the total fuel consumption  
since the vehicle was purchased or the past  
data was reset. The average fuel economy  
is calculated and displayed every minute.  
Distance-to-empty mode  
This mode displays the approximate  
distance you can travel on the remaining  
fuel based on the fuel economy.  
The distance-to-empty will be calculated  
and displayed every second.  
To reset the displayed past data, press the  
INFO switch for 1.5 seconds or longer.  
After resetting the data, - - - L/100 km  
(- - - mpg) is displayed for one minute  
before the fuel economy is recalculated  
and displayed.  
NOTE  
Even though the distance-to-empty  
display may indicate a sufficient amount  
of remaining driving distance before  
refueling is required, refuel as soon as  
possible if the fuel level is very low or  
the low fuel warning light illuminates.  
NOTE  
If TRIP A is reset using the trip meter  
when the function which synchronizes  
(resets) the fuel economy monitor and the  
trip meter (TRIP A) is on, the displayed  
past data is reset.  
4-52  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Current fuel economy mode  
Display  
N
Direction  
North  
This mode displays the current fuel  
economy by calculating the amount of fuel  
consumption and the distance traveled.  
S
South  
E
East  
W
West  
Current fuel economy will be calculated  
and displayed every 2 seconds.  
NE  
NW  
SE  
Northeast  
Northwest  
Southeast  
Southwest  
SW  
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed  
Display  
▼
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3  
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be  
displayed.  
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise  
control is displayed.  
Compass mode  
The direction the vehicle is moving is  
displayed in one of eight directions while  
the vehicle is being driven.  
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-271.  
4-53  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
▼
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and specifications.  
Instrument Cluster  
Center of Dashboard  
Warning lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas  
Warning Indication/Warning Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
*1*2  
7-22  
Brake System Warning Light  
Electronic Brake  
Force Distribu‐  
tion System  
Warning  
*1  
ABS Warning Light  
7-22  
ABS warning  
7-25  
*1  
7-22  
7-22  
7-22  
Charging System Warning Light  
*1  
Engine Oil Warning Light  
*1  
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light  
*1  
7-25  
7-25  
Master Warning Light  
*1  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light  
4-54  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Page  
Flashing  
4-100  
*1  
Brake Pedal Operation Demand Warning Light  
Buzzer & Flash‐  
ing  
(Red)  
7-25  
*1  
7-25  
7-25  
Check Engine Light  
*1  
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light  
*1  
7-25  
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Flashing  
7-25  
*1  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  
Turns on  
7-31  
Turns on  
7-25  
*1  
KEY Warning Light  
Flashing  
7-31  
(Red)  
*1  
7-25  
LED Headlight Warning Light  
*
*1  
7-31  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Warning Light  
(Amber)  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
7-31  
7-31  
*1  
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light  
*1  
7-31  
7-31  
Engine Oil Level Warning Light  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Front seat)  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Rear seat)  
7-31  
7-31  
7-31  
(Red)  
*
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light  
Door-Ajar Warning Light  
*
1
The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or  
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
*Some models.  
4-55  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
*
2
The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.  
Indication/Indicator Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system  
malfunction.  
Signal  
Indicator  
Seat Belt Indicator Light (Rear seat)  
Page  
2-30  
(Green)  
*
*1  
2-72  
4-5  
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light  
KEY Indicator Light  
(Green)  
*1  
3-43  
4-57  
Security Indicator Light  
*1  
Wrench Indication/Indicator Light  
Shift Position Indication  
4-63  
Lights-On Indication/Indicator Light  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
4-72  
Headlight  
High-Low Beam  
4-76  
Flashing the  
Headlights  
4-76  
Turn and  
Lane-Change  
Signals  
4-79  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
Brake Pedal Operation demand Indicator Light  
Hazard Warning  
Flasher  
4-87  
4-97  
(Green)  
*1  
4-102  
AUTOHOLD Active Indicator Light  
*Some models.  
4-56  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Page  
Traction Control  
System (TCS)  
4-107  
Dynamic Stabil‐  
ity Control  
(DSC)  
*1  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
4-109  
Turns on  
7-25  
*
*1  
4-107  
4-112  
TCS OFF Indicator Light  
Select Mode Indication  
Malfunction  
7-25  
*
*1  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light  
Except malfunc‐  
tion  
4-129  
*
*
4-196  
4-196  
4-272  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Indicator Light  
(Red)  
*1  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF Indicator Light  
Cruise Main Indication  
Cruise Set Indication  
(White)  
(Green)  
4-272  
*
1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off  
a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains  
turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
wrench indicator light turns on and then  
turns off after a few seconds.  
Wrench Indicator Light  
▼
The wrench indicator light turns on under  
the following conditions:  
When the preset maintenance period has  
arrived.  
*Some models.  
4-57  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
When it’s time to replace the engine oil.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))/Information (Mazda Connect  
(Type B)) section in the Mazda Connect  
Owner's Manual.  
NOTE  
The wrench indicator light turns on  
earlier than the preset period depending  
on vehicle usage conditions.  
Whenever the engine oil is replaced, a  
reset of the vehicle engine control unit is  
necessary.  
Refer to the Applications (Mazda  
Connect (Type A))/Information (Mazda  
Connect (Type B)) section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-58  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Active Driving Display*  
Dust-proof sheet  
Display  
Optical  
receiver  
WARNING  
Always adjust the display brightness and position with the vehicle stopped:  
Adjusting the display brightness and position while driving the vehicle is dangerous as doing  
so could distract your attention from the road ahead and lead to an accident.  
CAUTION  
Do not place beverages near the active driving display. If water or other liquids are splashed  
on the active driving display, it could cause damage.  
Do not place objects above the active driving display or apply stickers to the dust-proof  
sheet/optical receiver as they will cause interference.  
A sensor is integrated to control the display's luminosity. If the optical receiver is covered,  
the display's luminosity will lower making the display difficult to view.  
Do not allow intense light to hit the optical receiver. Otherwise, it could cause damage.  
NOTE  
Wearing polarized sunglasses will reduce the visibility of the active driving display due to  
the characteristics of the display.  
If the battery has been removed and re-installed or the battery voltage is low, the adjusted  
position may deviate.  
The display may be difficult to view or temporarily affected by weather conditions such as  
rain, snow, light, and temperature.  
If the audio system is removed, the active driving display cannot be operated.  
The active driving display indicates the following information:  
*Some models.  
4-59  
 
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on page 4-125.  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR) traffic signs and Warnings  
Refer to Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR) on page 4-130.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) on page 4-146.  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) on page 4-161.  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Operation  
Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on  
page 4-177.  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS) Warnings  
Refer to Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS) on page 4-191.  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F) Warnings  
Refer to Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F) on page 4-194.  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Smart Brake Support (SBS) on page 4-202.  
Cruise Control Operation Conditions  
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-271.  
Navigation Guidance (vehicles with navigation system)  
Speed limit indicator (vehicles with navigation system)  
Vehicle Speed  
The active driving display settings can be changed or adjusted.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
NOTE  
The desired driving position (display position, brightness level, display information) can  
be called up after programming the position.  
Refer to Driving Position Memory on page 2-11.  
4-60  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Automatic Transaxle Controls  
Lock-release button  
Various Lockouts:  
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release  
button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).  
Indicates the selector lever can be shifted freely into any position.  
Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.  
NOTE  
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle that  
gives the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to  
shift gears. Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional  
automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode  
and an inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the  
engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally  
slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-64).  
4-61  
 
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Shift-Lock System  
Transaxle Ranges  
The shift-lock system prevents shifting out  
of P unless the brake pedal is depressed.  
The shift position indication in the  
instrument cluster illuminates.  
Refer to Indication/Indicator Lights on  
page 4-26, 4-43, 4-56.  
The selector lever must be in P or N  
position to operate the starter.  
To shift from P:  
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Start the engine.  
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.  
4. Move the selector lever.  
P (Park)  
P locks the transaxle and prevents the  
front wheels from rotating.  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or  
the ignition is switched off, the selector  
lever cannot be shifted from P position.  
The ignition cannot be switched to OFF  
WARNING  
Always set the selector lever to P position  
and set the parking brake:  
if the selector lever is not in P position.  
Only setting the selector lever to the P  
position without using the parking brake to  
hold the vehicle is dangerous. If P fails to  
hold, the vehicle could move and cause an  
accident.  
Shift-Lock Override  
▼
If the selector lever will not move from P  
using the proper shift procedure, continue  
to hold down the brake pedal.  
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover  
using a cloth-wrapped flat head  
screwdriver.  
CAUTION  
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.  
Shifting into P, N or R while the vehicle is  
moving can damage your transaxle.  
Shifting into a driving gear or reverse  
when the engine is running faster than  
idle can damage the transaxle.  
Cover  
R (Reverse)  
In position R, the vehicle moves only  
backward. You must be at a complete stop  
before shifting to or from R, except under  
rare circumstances as explained in  
Rocking the Vehicle (page 3-48).  
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.  
4. Move the selector lever.  
Take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer to have the system checked.  
4-62  
 
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(With parking sensor system)  
When the selector lever is shifted to the R  
position with the ignition switched ON, the  
parking sensor system is activated and a  
beep sound is heard.  
Apply the parking brake or depress the  
brake pedal before moving the selector  
lever from N position to prevent the  
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.  
D (Drive)  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page  
4-296.  
D is the normal driving position. From a  
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift  
through a 6-gear sequence.  
N (Neutral)  
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not  
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even  
on the slightest incline unless the parking  
brake or brakes are on.  
M (Manual)  
M is the manual shift mode position.  
Gears can be shifted up or down by  
operating the selector lever. Refer to  
Manual Shift Mode on page 4-64.  
WARNING  
Shift Position Indication  
▼
If the engine is running faster than idle, do  
not shift from N or P into a driving gear:  
It's dangerous to shift from N or P into a  
driving gear when the engine is running  
faster than idle. If this is done, the vehicle  
could move suddenly, causing an accident  
or serious injury.  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B/C)  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle:  
Shifting into N while driving is dangerous.  
Engine braking cannot be applied when  
decelerating which could lead to an  
accident or serious injury.  
The selector position is indicated when the  
ignition is switched ON.  
Gear position indication  
CAUTION  
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift  
position indication illuminates and the  
numeral for the selected gear is displayed.  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle  
damage.  
4-63  
 
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
▼
Manual Shift Mode  
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
The manual shift mode gives you the feel  
of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by  
allowing you to operate the selector lever  
manually. This allows you to control  
engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels  
much like a manual transaxle when more  
control is desired.  
automatically controls the transaxle shift  
points to best suit the road conditions and  
driver input. This improves driving feel.  
The transaxle may switch to AAS mode  
when driving up and down slopes,  
cornering, driving at high elevations, or  
depressing the accelerator pedal quickly  
while the selector lever is in the D  
position. Depending on the road and  
driving conditions/vehicle operations, gear  
shifting could be delayed or not occur,  
however, this does not indicate a problem  
because the AAS mode will maintain the  
optimum gear position.  
To change to manual shift mode, shift the  
lever from D to M.  
NOTE  
Changing to manual shift mode while  
driving will not damage the transaxle.  
To return to automatic shift mode, shift the  
lever from M to D.  
NOTE  
If you change to manual shift mode  
when the vehicle is stopped, the gear  
will shift to M1.  
If you change to manual shift mode  
without depressing the accelerator pedal  
when driving in D range, 5th gear/6th  
gear, the gear will shift to M4/M5.  
Indications  
▼
Manual shift mode indication  
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift  
position indication in the instrument panel  
illuminates.  
4-64  
 
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Gear position indication  
Manually Shifting Up  
▼
The numeral for the selected gear  
illuminates.  
You can shift gears up by operating the  
selector lever or the steering shift  
switches .  
*
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6  
Using selector lever  
Manual shift mode  
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the  
selector lever back once.  
indication  
Gear position  
indication  
Instrument Cluster (Type B/C)  
Manual shift mode  
indication  
Gear position  
indication  
*
Using steering shift switch  
NOTE  
If the gears cannot be shifted down  
To shift up to a higher gear with the  
when driving at higher speeds, the gear  
position indication will flash twice to  
signal that the gears cannot be shifted  
down (to protect the transaxle).  
steering shift switches, pull the UP switch  
(
) toward you once with your  
fingers.  
UP switch (+/OFF)  
If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)  
temperature becomes too high, there is  
the possibility that the transaxle will  
switch to automatic shift mode,  
canceling manual shift mode and  
turning off the gear position indication  
illumination. This is a normal function  
to protect the AT. After the ATF  
temperature has decreased, the gear  
position indication illumination turns  
back on and driving in manual shift  
mode is restored.  
*Some models.  
4-65  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Using selector lever  
WARNING  
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the  
selector lever forward once.  
Keep your hands on the steering wheel rim  
when using fingers on the steering shift  
switches:  
Putting your hands inside the rim of the  
steering wheel when using the steering  
shift switches is dangerous. If the driver's  
air bag were to deploy in a collision, your  
hands could be impacted causing injury.  
NOTE  
*
Using steering shift switch  
When driving slowly, the gears may not  
To shift down to a lower gear with the  
steering shift switches, pull the DOWN  
switch toward you once with your  
fingers.  
shift up.  
Do not drive the vehicle with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE  
while in manual shift mode. In addition,  
manual shift mode switches to automatic  
shift mode while the accelerator pedal is  
completely depressed.  
DOWN switch (-)  
This function is canceled while the TCS  
is turned off or the Off-Road Traction  
Assist is turned on. However, if the  
vehicle is continuously driven at a high  
rpm, the gears may automatically shift  
up to protect the engine.  
The steering shift switch can be used  
WARNING  
temporarily even if the selector lever is  
in the D position while driving. In  
addition, it returns to automatic shift  
Do not use engine braking on slippery road  
surfaces or at high speeds:  
mode when the UP switch (  
) is  
Shifting down while driving on wet, snowy,  
or frozen roads, or while driving at high  
speeds causes sudden engine braking,  
which is dangerous. The sudden change in  
tire speed could cause the tires to skid. This  
could lead to loss of vehicle control and an  
accident.  
pulled rearward for a sufficient amount  
of time.  
Manually Shifting Down  
▼
You can shift gears down by operating the  
selector lever or the steering shift  
*
switches .  
M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2→ M1  
*Some models.  
4-66  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Keep your hands on the steering wheel rim  
when using fingers on the steering shift  
switches:  
Putting your hands inside the rim of the  
steering wheel when using the steering  
shift switches is dangerous. If the driver's  
air bag were to deploy in a collision, your  
hands could be impacted causing injury.  
NOTE  
When driving at high speeds, the gear  
may not shift down.  
During deceleration, the gear may  
automatically shift down depending on  
vehicle speed.  
When depressing the accelerator fully,  
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed. However,  
the gears do not kickdown while the TCS  
is turned off or the Off-Road Traction  
Assist is operating.  
Second Gear Fixed Mode  
▼
When the selector lever is moved back  
while the vehicle speed is about 10 km/h  
(6.2 mph) or less, the transaxle is set in the  
second gear fixed mode. The gear is fixed  
in second while in this mode for easier  
acceleration from a stop and driving on  
slippery roads such as snow-covered  
roads.  
If the selector lever is moved back or  
forward while in the second gear fixed  
mode, the mode will be canceled.  
4-67  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Shift Gear (Shifting) Speed Limit  
▼
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows: When the  
selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is shifted.  
Shift up  
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.  
Shift down  
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the gear  
position indication flashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted.  
Kickdown  
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.  
However, the gears do not kickdown while the TCS is turned off or the Off-Road Traction  
Assist is operating.  
NOTE  
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fixed mode.  
Auto-shift down  
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fixed mode, the gear remains in  
second.  
4-68  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
Recommendations for Shifting  
▼
Upshifting  
For normal acceleration and cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:  
(U.S.A. and Canada)  
*1  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
M1 to M2  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
M4 to M5  
M5 to M6  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
73 km/h (45 mph)  
81 km/h (50 mph)  
*
1
Always observe local speed limit regulations.  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the  
engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.  
4-69  
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
NOTE  
Direct Mode*  
Shifting up and down while in direct mode  
may not be possible depending on the  
vehicle speed. In addition, because direct  
mode is canceled (released) depending on  
the rate of acceleration or if the  
accelerator is fully depressed, use of the  
manual shift mode is recommended if you  
need to drive the vehicle in a particular  
gear for long periods.  
Direct mode can be used for temporarily  
switching gears by operating the steering  
shift switch while the vehicle is being  
driven with the selector lever in the D  
position.  
While in direct mode, the D and M  
indication illuminate and the gear position  
in use is illuminated.  
Direct mode is canceled (released) under  
the following conditions.  
The UP switch (  
) is pulled  
rearward for a certain amount of time or  
longer.  
The vehicle is driven for a certain  
amount of time or longer (time differs  
depending on the driving conditions  
while operating).  
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a  
slow speed.  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Direct mode  
Gear position  
indication  
indication  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Direct mode  
Gear position  
indication  
indication  
*Some models.  
4-70  
 
When Driving  
Automatic Transaxle  
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the  
load weight and grade steepness.  
3. Release the brake pedal while  
gradually accelerating.  
Driving Tips  
WARNING  
Descending steep grades  
Do not let the vehicle move in a direction  
opposite to the direction selected by the  
selector lever:  
When descending a steep grade, shift to  
lower gears, depending on load weight and  
grade steepness. Descend slowly, using the  
brakes only occasionally to prevent them  
from overheating.  
Do not let the vehicle move backward with  
the selector lever in a forward position, or  
do not let the vehicle move forward with  
the selector lever in the reverse position.  
Otherwise, the engine may stop, causing  
the loss of the power brake and power  
steering functions, and make it difficult to  
control the vehicle which could result in an  
accident.  
Passing  
For extra power when passing another  
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress  
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will  
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle  
speed.  
NOTE  
The accelerator pedal may initially feel  
heavy as it is being depressed, then feel  
lighter as it is depressed further. This  
change in pedal force aids the engine  
control system in determining how much  
the accelerator pedal has been  
depressed for performing kickdown, and  
functions to control whether or not  
kickdown should be performed.  
Climbing steep grades from a stop  
To climb a steep grade from a stopped  
position:  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
4-71  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Lighting Control  
Headlights  
▼
Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights and other exterior lights on or off.  
When the lights are turned on, the lights-on indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on.  
NOTE  
If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30  
seconds after switching the ignition off.  
The time setting can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
To prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless  
safety requires them.  
Without auto-light control  
Switch Position  
Ignition Position  
OFF  
ACC or  
ACC or  
OFF  
ACC or  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
*2  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
*1  
*1  
Daytime running lights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License plate lights  
Side-marker lights  
*2  
*2  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
*
*
1
2
The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven.  
The lights are turned on for the specified period by the auto headlight off function.  
4-72  
   
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
With auto-light control  
(Except Canada)  
Switch Position  
Ignition Position  
OFF  
ACC or  
AUTO  
ACC or  
OFF  
ACC or  
OFF  
ACC or  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
*2  
*4  
*4  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
*1  
*3  
*1  
Daytime running lights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License plate lights  
Side-marker lights  
*2  
*4  
*4  
*4  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
On  
*
1
2
3
The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven.  
The lights are turned on by the auto light function.  
The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven, and turned off when the headlights are turned on by the  
auto light function.  
*
*
*
4
The lights are turned on for the specified period by the auto headlight off function.  
4-73  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
(Canada)  
Ignition Position  
Switch Position  
Headlights  
ACC or OFF  
ON  
*1  
*1  
AUTO  
AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Daytime running  
lights  
Off  
Off  
*2*4  
*3*4  
Auto  
Auto  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License plate lights  
Side-marker lights  
*5  
*5  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
*
*
1
2
The light switch returns to the AUTO position automatically.  
During the daytime, the daytime running lights turn on automatically. During the nighttime, the headlights,  
parking lights, taillights, and the license plate lights turn on automatically.  
*
*
3
4
During the daytime, the daytime running lights, parking lights, taillights, and the license plate lights turn on  
automatically. During the nighttime, the headlights, parking lights, taillights, and the license plate lights turn  
on automatically.  
When the light switch is switched to the OFF position while the vehicle is stopped, all of the lights that are  
turned on turn off. When the light switch is switched from a position other than  
to the  
position  
while the vehicle is stopped, the daytime running lights or the headlights turn off. When starting to drive the  
vehicle, the lights that are turned off turn on again.  
The lights are turned on continuously if the ignition is switched from ON to any other position with the lights  
turned on. The lights are turned off when the driver's door is opened or 30 seconds have elapsed since the  
lights turned on.  
*
5
*
Auto-light control  
(Except Canada)  
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON, the  
light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the  
headlights and other exterior lights on or off.  
*Some models.  
4-74  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
(Canada)  
When the headlight switch is in a position other than  
and the ignition is switched ON, the  
light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the  
headlights and other exterior lights on or off.  
CAUTION  
Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise  
the light sensor will not operate correctly.  
The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands and  
scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the  
ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades could be  
damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are going to clean the windshield,  
be sure the wipers are turned off completely when it is particularly tempting to leave the  
engine running. This is particularly important when clearing ice and snow.  
NOTE  
The headlights and other exterior lights may not turn off immediately even if the  
surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor determines that it is night time  
if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long  
tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.  
In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the OFF position.  
If the headlight switch and the windshield wiper switch are in AUTO, and the wipers are  
operated at low or high speed by the auto wiper control for several seconds, bad weather  
conditions are determined and the headlights may be turned on.  
The sensitivity of the auto-light control may be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-75  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
simultaneously. The lever will return to  
the normal position when released.  
Headlight High-Low Beam  
▼
The headlights switch between high and  
low beams by moving the lever forward or  
backward.  
Coming Home Light  
High beam  
Low beam  
▼
The coming home light turns on the  
headlights (low beams) when the lever is  
operated.  
To turn on the lights  
When the lever is pulled with the ignition  
switched to ACC or OFF, the low beam  
headlights turn on.  
When the headlight high-beams are on, the  
headlight high-beam indicator light is  
turned on.  
The headlights turn off after a certain  
period of time has elapsed after all of the  
doors are closed.  
Flashing the Headlights  
▼
Can be used when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully  
towards you (the headlight switch does not  
need to be on).  
NOTE  
OFF  
The time until the headlights turn off  
after all of the doors are closed can be  
changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Headlight  
flashing  
If no operations are done for 3 minutes  
after the lever is pulled, the headlights  
turn off.  
The headlights turn off if the lever is  
pulled again while the headlights are  
illuminated.  
The headlight high-beam indicator light in  
the instrument cluster illuminates  
4-76  
   
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
When the headlight switch is turned to  
the OFF position, the headlights turn  
off.  
Leaving Home Light  
▼
The leaving home light turns on the lights  
when the transmitter unlock button is  
pressed while away from the vehicle.  
The following lights turn on when the  
leaving home light is operated.  
Headlight Leveling  
▼
The number of passengers and weight of  
cargo in the luggage compartment change  
the angle of the headlights.  
Low beams, Parking lights, Taillights,  
License plate lights.  
To turn on the lights  
Auto type  
When the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are in the following conditions, the  
headlights will illuminate when the  
transmitter unlock button is pressed and  
the vehicle receives the transmitter signal.  
The headlights turn off after a certain  
period of time has elapsed (30 seconds).  
The angle of the headlights will be  
automatically adjusted when turning on  
the headlights.  
A system malfunction or operation  
conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Refer to Contact Mazda Dealer and Have  
Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
Ignition switch: off  
Headlight switch: AUTO,  
, or  
Manual type  
The headlight leveling switch is used to  
adjust the angle of the headlights  
manually.  
Lock button  
Unlock  
button  
NOTE  
Operation of the leaving home light can  
be turned on or off.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the transmitter lock button is  
pressed and the vehicle receives the  
transmitter signal, the headlights turn  
off.  
4-77  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
Select the proper headlight angle from the  
following chart.  
When the light switch is switched to the  
position, the daytime running lights turn  
off. If you want to drive the vehicle with  
the daytime running lights turned on,  
switch the light switch to a position other  
Front seat  
Switch  
Posi‐  
tion  
Rear  
seat  
Load  
Driver Passenger  
×
×
×
×
×
―
×
―
―
×
―
―
―
×
0
0
than  
.
×
1
×
×
1
―
―
×
1.5  
×: Yes  
―: No  
Daytime Running Lights  
▼
Some countries require moving vehicles to  
have their lights on (daytime running  
lights) during the daytime.  
Except Canada  
The daytime running lights turn on when  
the vehicle is driven and turn off when the  
parking brake is operated or the selector  
lever is shifted to the P position.  
NOTE  
The daytime running lights can be  
deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Canada  
The daytime running lights continuously  
turn on when the ignition is switched ON.  
When the light switch is switched to the  
OFF or  
position while the vehicle is  
stopped, the daytime running lights turns  
off. When you start driving the vehicle,  
they turn on again.  
4-78  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Turn and Lane-Change  
Signals  
Lane-Change Signals  
▼
The ignition must be switched ON to use  
the turn and lane-change signals.  
Move the lever halfway toward the  
direction of the lane change―until the  
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It  
will return to the off position when  
released.  
Turn Signals  
▼
Move the signal lever down (for a left  
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop  
position. The signal will self-cancel after  
the turn is completed.  
Three-Flash Turn Signal  
▼
After releasing the turn signal lever, the  
turn signal indicator flashes 3 times. The  
operation can be canceled by moving the  
lever in the direction opposite to which it  
was operated.  
If the indicator light continues to flash  
after a turn, manually return the lever to its  
original position.  
Right turn  
NOTE  
The three-flash turn signal function can be  
switched to operable/inoperable using the  
personalization function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Right lane change  
OFF  
Left lane change  
Left turn  
The turn signal indicators in the  
instrument cluster flash according to the  
operation of the turn signal lever to show  
which signal is working.  
NOTE  
There may be a problem with the turn  
signal lights if they do not flash but  
remain turned on, or they flash  
abnormally. Have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A personalized function is available to  
change the turn indicator sound volume.  
4-79  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
If the amount of washer fluid spray is  
insufficient, do not use the washer  
switch. If the washer switch continues to  
be operated with no washer fluid being  
sprayed, it could lead to pump damage.  
Windshield Wipers and  
Washer  
The ignition must be switched ON to use  
the wipers.  
NOTE  
WARNING  
If the windshield wipers are operated  
under cold weather conditions or during  
snowfall, they could stop due to  
accumulated snow on the windshield. If  
the windshield wipers stop due to  
accumulated snow on the windshield, park  
the vehicle in a safe place, turn the wiper  
switch off, and then remove the  
Use only windshield washer fluid or plain  
water in the reservoir:  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer fluid is  
dangerous. If sprayed on the windshield, it  
will dirty the windshield, affect your  
visibility, and could result in an accident.  
accumulated snow. If the wiper switch is  
turned to another position other than OFF,  
the wipers will operate. If the wipers do  
not operate even though the wiper switch  
is turned to a position other than OFF,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible.  
Only use windshield washer fluid mixed  
with anti-freeze protection in freezing  
weather conditions:  
Using windshield washer fluid without  
anti-freeze protection in freezing weather  
conditions is dangerous as it could freeze  
on the windshield and block your vision  
which could cause an accident. In addition,  
make sure the windshield is sufficiently  
warmed using the defroster before  
spraying the washer fluid.  
Windshield Wipers  
▼
Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever  
up or down.  
With intermittent wiper  
CAUTION  
When the wipers are not used during  
freezing temperatures or for a long time,  
the wiper rubber may adhere to the  
glass. If the wipers are operated while  
adhered to the glass, it could damage  
the wiper rubber and motor.  
If the wipers are operated while the glass  
is dry, the glass could be scratched and  
the wiper rubber damaged. When the  
glass is dry, spray washer fluid before  
operating the wipers.  
Switch Posi‐  
Wiper operation  
tion  
MIST  
Operation while pulling up lever  
4-80  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
*
Switch Posi‐  
Auto-wiper control  
Wiper operation  
tion  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, the rain sensor senses the amount  
of rainfall on the windshield and turns the  
wipers on or off automatically  
(off―intermittent―low speed―high  
speed).  
OFF  
INT  
LO  
Stop  
Intermittent  
Low speed  
High speed  
HI  
Variable-speed intermittent wipers  
Set the lever to the intermittent position  
and choose the interval timing by rotating  
the ring.  
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be  
adjusted by turning the switch on the  
wiper lever.  
From the center position (normal), rotate  
the switch upward for higher sensitivity  
(faster response) or rotate it downward for  
less sensitivity (slower response).  
Less sensitivity  
Switch  
INT ring  
Center  
position  
With auto-wiper control  
Higher sensitivity  
Switch Posi‐  
Wiper operation  
tion  
MIST  
OFF  
AUTO  
LO  
Operation while pulling up lever  
Stop  
Auto control  
Low speed  
High speed  
HI  
*Some models.  
4-81  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
Switching the auto-wiper lever from the  
OFF to the AUTO position while driving  
activates the windshield wipers once,  
after which they operate according to  
the rainfall amount.  
Do not shade the rain sensor by adhering  
a sticker or a label on the windshield.  
Otherwise the rain sensor will not  
operate correctly.  
The auto-wiper control may not operate  
when the rain sensor temperature is  
about －10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or  
about 85 °C (185 °F) or higher.  
If the windshield is coated with water  
repellent, the rain sensor may not be  
able to sense the amount of rainfall  
correctly and the auto-wiper control  
may not operate properly.  
If dirt or foreign matter (such as ice or  
matter containing salt water) adheres to  
the windshield above the rain sensor, or  
if the windshield is iced, it could cause  
the wipers to move automatically.  
However, if the wipers cannot remove  
this ice, dirt or foreign matter, the  
auto-wiper control will stop operation.  
In this case, set the wiper lever to the  
low speed position or high speed  
position for manual operation, or  
remove the ice, dirt or foreign matter by  
hand to restore the auto-wiper  
When the ignition is switched ON and  
the wiper lever is in the AUTO position,  
the windshield wipers may operate  
automatically in the following cases:  
The area of the windshield above the  
rain sensor is touched or wiped with a  
cloth.  
The windshield or the rain sensor area  
in the cabin is hit.  
When the ignition is switched ON and  
the wiper lever is in the AUTO position,  
do not touch the windshield or the  
windshield wipers Otherwise, the  
windshield wipers will operate  
automatically which could catch your  
fingers or damage the windshield wipers.  
When removing ice or snow, or cleaning  
the windshield, always make sure the  
wiper lever is in the OFF position.  
operation.  
If the auto-wiper lever is left in the  
AUTO position, the wipers could  
operate automatically from the effect of  
strong light sources, electromagnetic  
waves, or infrared light because the rain  
sensor uses an optical sensor. It is  
recommended that the auto-wiper lever  
be switched to the OFF position other  
than when driving the vehicle under  
rainy conditions.  
(With auto-wiper control (Except  
Canada))  
4-82  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
If the headlight switch and the  
Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer  
The ignition must be switched ON to use  
the wiper.  
windshield wiper switch are in AUTO,  
and the wipers are operated at low or  
high speed by the auto wiper control for  
several seconds, bad weather conditions  
are determined and the headlights may  
be turned on.  
Rear Window Wiper  
▼
The auto-wiper control functions can be  
turned off. Refer to the Settings section  
in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Windshield Washer  
▼
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to  
spray washer fluid.  
OFF  
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear  
wiper/washer switch.  
Washer  
Switch Posi‐  
Wiper operation  
tion  
OFF  
INT  
ON  
Stop  
NOTE  
Intermittent  
Normal  
If the windshield washer is turned on when  
the windshield wipers are not operating,  
the windshield wipers operate a few times.  
Rear Window Washer  
▼
If the washer does not work, inspect the  
fluid level (page 6-24). If the fluid level  
is normal, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/  
washer switch to either of the position.  
After the switch is released, the washer  
will stop.  
If the washer does not work, inspect the  
fluid level (page 6-24). If the fluid level  
is normal and the washer still does not  
work, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
4-83  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Fully Automatic Climate Control  
System  
Rear Window Defogger  
The rear window defogger clears fog from  
the rear window.  
Indicator light  
The ignition must be switched ON to use  
the defogger.  
Press the switch to turn on the rear  
window defogger. The rear window  
defogger operates for about 15 minutes  
and then turns off automatically.  
The indicator light illuminates when the  
defogger is operating.  
CAUTION  
To turn off the rear window defogger  
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press  
the switch again.  
Do not use sharp instruments or window  
cleaners with abrasives to clean the  
inside of the rear window surface. They  
may damage the defogger grid inside the  
window.  
Manual Climate Control System  
Indicator light  
NOTE  
This defogger is not designed for  
melting snow. If there is an  
accumulation of snow on the rear  
window, remove it before using the  
defogger.  
The rear window defogger setting can  
be changed. After changing the setting,  
the rear window defogger stops  
automatically after 15 minutes have  
elapsed and when the ambient  
temperature is high. When the ambient  
temperature is low, it continues to  
operate until the switch is pressed  
again.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-84  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Windshield Wiper De-icer*  
Fully Automatic Climate Control  
System  
▼
The thermal filaments at the following  
positions heat up and facilitate the removal  
of snow accumulated on the windshield.  
Indicator light  
Mirror Defogger*  
▼
The mirror defoggers defrost the outside  
mirrors.  
The windshield wiper de-icer operates in  
conjunction with the rear window  
defogger.  
To turn on the windshield wiper de-icer,  
switch the ignition ON and press the rear  
window defogger switch (page 4-84).  
Manual Climate Control System  
The mirror defoggers operate in  
conjunction with the rear window  
defogger.  
To turn on the mirror defoggers, switch the  
ignition ON and press the rear window  
defogger switch (page 4-84).  
Manual Climate Control System  
Indicator light  
Indicator light  
*Some models.  
4-85  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Fully Automatic Climate Control  
System  
Horn  
To sound the horn, press the  
the steering wheel.  
mark on  
Indicator light  
4-86  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
The hazard warning lights should always  
be used when you stop on or near a  
roadway in an emergency.  
HomeLink Wireless  
Control System (Type A)*  
NOTE  
HomeLink and HomeLink house icon are  
registered trademarks of Gentex  
Corporation.  
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3  
hand-held transmitters with a single  
built-in component in the auto-dimming  
mirror. Pressing the HomeLink button on  
the auto-dimming mirror activates garage  
doors, gates and other devices surrounding  
your home.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard  
and that they must take extreme caution  
when near it.  
Indicator light  
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all  
the turn signals will flash. The hazard  
warning indicator lights in the instrument  
cluster flash simultaneously.  
HomeLink button  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Do not use the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the safety  
stop and reverse feature:  
Using the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the safety  
stop and reverse feature as required by  
federal safety standards is dangerous. (This  
includes garage doors manufactured  
before April 1, 1982.)  
The turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning lights are on.  
Check local regulations about the use of  
hazard warning lights while the vehicle  
is being towed to verify that it is not in  
violation of the law.  
*Some models.  
4-87  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Using these garage door openers can  
increase the risk of serious injury or death.  
For further information, contact HomeLink  
at 1-800-355-3515 or www.homelink.com  
or an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Programming the HomeLink  
System  
▼
CAUTION  
When programming a garage door opener  
or a gate, disconnect the power to these  
devices before performing programming.  
Continuous operation of the devices could  
damage the motor.  
Always check the areas surrounding  
garage doors and gates for people or  
obstructions before programming or  
during operation of the HomeLink system:  
Programming or operating the HomeLink  
system without verifying the safety of areas  
surrounding garage doors and gates is  
dangerous and could result in an  
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons  
which can be individually selected and  
programmed using the transmitters for  
current, on-market devices as follows:  
1. Disconnect the power to the garage  
door opener or gate programmed to the  
hand-held transmitter.  
unexpected accident and serious injury if  
someone were to be hit.  
NOTE  
The programming will not be erased even  
if the battery is disconnected.  
2. Position the end of your hand-held  
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)  
away from the HomeLink button you  
wish to program while keeping the  
indicator light in view.  
Pre-programming the HomeLink  
System  
▼
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the  
chosen HomeLink and hand-held  
transmitter buttons. Do not release the  
buttons until step 3 has been  
NOTE  
It is recommended that a new battery be  
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the  
device being programmed to HomeLink  
for quicker training and accurate  
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.  
completed.  
NOTE  
Some gate operators and garage door  
openers may require you to replace  
this Programming Step 2 with  
procedures noted in the “Gate  
Operator/Canadian Programming”  
section.  
Verify that there is a remote control  
transmitter available for the device you  
would like to program.  
Disconnect the power to the device.  
4. After the HomeLink indicator light  
changes from a slow to a rapidly  
blinking light, release both the  
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter  
buttons.  
4-88  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
8. Firmly press and release the “learn” or  
“smart” button. (The name and color  
of the button may vary by  
If the HomeLink indicator light does  
not change to a rapidly blinking light,  
contact HomeLink at  
manufacturer.)  
www.homelink.com or call  
NOTE  
1-800-355-3515 for assistance.  
5. Connect the power to the garage door  
opener or gate programmed to the  
hand-held transmitter.  
6. Firmly press and hold the programmed  
HomeLink button for five seconds, and  
then release it. Perform this operation  
two times to activate the door or gate.  
If the door or gate does not activate,  
press and hold the just-trained  
HomeLink button and observe the  
indicator light.  
Complete the programming within 30  
seconds.  
9. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,  
hold for two seconds and release the  
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat  
the “press/hold/release” sequence a  
second time, and, depending on the  
brand of the garage door opener (or  
other rolling code equipped device),  
repeat this sequence a third time to  
complete the programming process.  
HomeLink should now activate your  
rolling code equipped device.  
If the indicator light stays on  
constantly, programming is complete  
and your device should activate when  
the HomeLink button is pressed and  
released.  
NOTE  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, begin with “Programming”―  
step 1  
NOTE  
For questions or comments, please contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or  
1-800-355-3515.  
To program the remaining two  
HomeLink buttons, begin with  
“Programming”― step 1  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for  
two seconds and then turns to a  
constant light, continue with  
“Programming” steps 7―9 to  
complete the programming of a rolling  
code equipped device (most commonly  
a garage door opener).  
Gate operator/Canadian  
Programming  
▼
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission ―  
which may not be long enough for  
HomeLink to pick up the signal during  
programming. Similar to this Canadian  
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed  
to “time-out” in the same manner.  
7. At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
antenna wire is attached to the  
motor-head unit.  
4-89  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
If you live in Canada or you are having  
difficulties programming a gate operator  
by using the “Programming” procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with  
the following:  
Erasing Programmed HomeLink  
Buttons  
▼
To erase the existing programming from  
all three operating channels, press and  
hold the two outside buttons (  
,
) on  
the auto-dimming mirror until the  
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash  
after approximately 10 seconds.  
Verify that the programming has been  
erased when you resell the vehicle.  
NOTE  
If programming a garage door opener or  
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the  
device during the “cycling” process to  
prevent possible overheating.  
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink  
button while you press and release ―  
every two seconds (“cycle”) your  
hand-held transmitter until the frequency  
signal has successfully been accepted by  
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash  
slowly and then rapidly.)  
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to  
complete.  
Operating the HomeLink System  
▼
Press the programmed HomeLink button  
to operate a programmed device. The code  
will continue being transmitted for a  
maximum of 20 seconds.  
Reprogramming the HomeLink  
system  
▼
To program a device to HomeLink using a  
HomeLink button previously trained,  
follow these steps:  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink  
button. DO NOT release the button.  
2. The indicator light will begin to flash  
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the  
HomeLink button, proceed with  
“Programming” - step 1.  
4-90  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Always check the areas surrounding  
garage doors and gates for people or  
obstructions before programming or  
during operation of the HomeLink system:  
Programming or operating the HomeLink  
system without verifying the safety of areas  
surrounding garage doors and gates is  
dangerous and could result in an  
HomeLink Wireless  
Control System (Type B)*  
NOTE  
HomeLink and HomeLink house are  
registered trademarks of Gentex  
Corporation.  
unexpected accident and serious injury if  
someone were to be hit.  
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3  
hand-held transmitters with a single  
built-in component in the auto-dimming  
mirror. Pressing the HomeLink button on  
the auto-dimming mirror activates garage  
doors, gates and other devices surrounding  
your home.  
NOTE  
The programming will not be erased even  
if the battery is disconnected.  
Pre-programming the HomeLink  
▼
System  
Indicator Light  
NOTE  
It is recommended that a new battery be  
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the  
device being programmed to HomeLink  
for quicker training and accurate  
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.  
HomeLink button  
Verify that there is a remote control  
WARNING  
transmitter available for the device you  
would like to program.  
Do not use the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the safety  
stop and reverse feature:  
Programming the HomeLink  
System  
▼
Using the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the safety  
stop and reverse feature as required by  
federal safety standards is dangerous. (This  
includes garage doors manufactured  
before April 1, 1982.)  
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons  
which can be individually selected and  
programmed using the transmitters for  
current, on-market devices as follows:  
Using these garage door openers can  
increase the risk of serious injury or death.  
For further information, contact HomeLink  
at www.homelink.com or  
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
*Some models.  
4-91  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
1. Press and release the HomeLink button  
you would like to program. The  
indicator light flashes slowly in amber  
when the button is pressed.  
If the indicator light flashes rapidly  
in green, firmly press and hold the  
Homelink button and release it after  
two seconds have passed. Repeat  
this process up to three times to  
complete the programming. The  
device becomes operational and  
programming is complete. If the  
device does not operate, go to the  
next step.  
Indicator Light  
HomeLink button  
5. At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
antenna wire is attached to the  
motor-head unit.  
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter 2.5 to  
7.5 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the  
HomeLink button you would like to  
program while keeping the indicator  
light in view.  
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or  
“smart” button. (The name and color  
of the button may vary by  
NOTE  
Depending on the hand-held  
transmitter, it may be easier to do the  
programming by holding it 15 to 20 cm  
(6 to 7.8 in) away from the HomeLink  
button.  
manufacturer.)  
NOTE  
Complete the programming within 30  
seconds.  
3. Press the hand-held transmitter button  
continuously until the indicator light  
changes from amber (flashing) to  
green (on/flashing).  
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press  
and hold the Homelink button, and  
then release it after two seconds have  
passed. Repeat the “press/hold/  
release” sequence a second time, and,  
depending on the brand of the garage  
door opener (or other rolling code  
equipped device), repeat this sequence  
a third time to complete the  
NOTE  
Some gate operators and garage door  
openers may require you to replace  
this Programming Step 3 with  
procedures noted in the “Gate  
Operator/Canadian Programming”  
section.  
programming process.  
Press the programmed HomeLink  
button and make sure that the  
HomeLink System operates.  
4. Press the HomeLink button again to  
check if the programming has been  
completed.  
If the indicator light remains on in  
green, the programming is complete  
and the device becomes operational.  
4-92  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
8. If the status indicator arrows are  
flashing, refer to Garage Door  
Two-Way Communication.  
Indicator Light  
If programming a garage door opener or  
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the  
device during the “cycling” process to  
prevent possible overheating.  
While the indicator light is flashing in  
amber, press the button on the hand-held  
transmitter for 2 seconds and release it  
repeatedly until the indicator light changes  
from amber to green.  
Go back to Step 4 of Programming the  
HomeLink System to complete the  
procedure.  
NOTE  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, go back to Step 1 of  
Programming the HomeLink System and  
repeat the procedure.  
For questions or comments, please contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or  
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or  
the HomeLink toll-free hotline at  
Operating the HomeLink System  
▼
Press the programmed HomeLink button  
to operate a programmed device.  
1-800-355-3515 (for calls placed outside  
of the USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico,  
international rates will apply and may  
differ based on landline or mobile phone).  
Reprogramming the HomeLink  
system  
▼
To program a device to HomeLink using a  
HomeLink button previously trained,  
follow these steps:  
Gate operator/Canadian  
Programming  
▼
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink  
button. DO NOT release the button.  
2. After 20 seconds, the indicator light  
flashes in amber. After the indicator  
light flashes, release the HomeLink  
button.  
3. Go back to Step 2 of Programming the  
HomeLink System to complete the  
procedure.  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission ―  
which may not be long enough for  
HomeLink to pick up the signal during  
programming. Similar to this Canadian  
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed  
to “time-out” in the same manner.  
NOTE  
If you live in Canada or are having  
difficulties programming a gate operator  
by using the programming procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
Step 3 of Programming the HomeLink  
System with the following:  
If the programming has not been  
completed, the system returns to the  
previous programming.  
4-93  
 
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Erasing Programmed HomeLink  
Buttons  
Garage Door Two-Way  
Communication  
▼
▼
The garage door two-way communication  
is a function that communicates with the  
garage door opener and indicates whether  
the garages door is open or closed using  
the indicator lights in the rear view mirror.  
It can indicate the status of the garage door  
within a range up-to 250 m (820 ft).  
NOTE  
All of the programmed HomeLink  
buttons are reset. Individual buttons  
cannot be reset, however, individual  
buttons can be reprogrammed. For  
individual button reprogramming, refer  
to Reprogramming the HomeLink  
System (page 4-93).  
NOTE  
The communication range may shorten  
depending on obstructions.  
Verify that the programming has been  
erased if you resell the vehicle.  
Programming two-way communication  
1. Press the two outer HomeLink buttons  
continuously at the same time until the  
indicator light flashes.  
Within five seconds after programming a  
new HomeLink button, both of the garage  
door status indicator lights will flash  
rapidly in green indicating that the garage  
door two-way communication has been  
established. If the garage door status  
indicator lights flash, the two-way  
communication programming is complete.  
HomeLink button 3  
HomeLink button 1  
If the garage door status indicator lights do  
not flash, the two-way communication  
programming is not completed. For  
additional HomeLink information and  
programming videos, refer to the  
following Websites:  
2. Stop pressing the HomeLink buttons.  
www.HomeLink.com  
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex  
4-94  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Operating the garage door two-way  
communication  
By pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 at  
the same time for two seconds, the status  
of the garage door is indicated for about 3  
seconds as follows:  
HomeLink button 2  
HomeLink button 1  
Garage door  
Indicator light  
status  
Amber flashes  
Closing  
Amber flashes  
Opening  
Green turns on  
Closed  
Green turns on  
Opened  
NOTE  
The programming will not be erased even  
if the battery is disconnected.  
4-95  
When Driving  
Brake  
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.  
Increased stopping distance or the vehicle  
pulling to one side when braking could  
result in a serious accident. Light braking  
will indicate whether the brakes have been  
affected.  
Brake System  
Foot Brake  
▼
This vehicle has power-assisted brakes  
that adjust automatically through normal  
use.  
CAUTION  
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by  
applying greater force than normal to the  
brake pedal. But the distance required to  
stop will be greater than usual.  
Do not drive with your foot held on the  
brake pedal. Doing so could result in the  
following:  
WARNING  
The brake parts will wear out more  
quickly.  
The brakes can overheat and adversely  
affect brake performance.  
Do not coast with the engine stalled or  
turned off, find a safe place to stop:  
Coasting with the engine stalled or turned  
off is dangerous. Braking will require more  
effort, and the brake's power-assist could  
be depleted if you pump the brake. This will  
cause longer stopping distances or even an  
accident.  
Always depress the brake pedal with the  
right foot. Applying the brakes with the  
unaccustomed left foot could slow your  
reaction time to an emergency situation  
resulting in insufficient braking  
operation.  
Shift to a lower gear when going down  
steep hills:  
Driving with your foot continuously on the  
brake pedal or steadily applying the brakes  
for long distances is dangerous. This causes  
overheated brakes, resulting in longer  
stopping distances or even total brake  
failure. This could cause loss of vehicle  
control and a serious accident. Avoid  
continuous application of the brakes.  
Wear shoes appropriate for driving in  
order to avoid your shoe contacting the  
brake pedal when depressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
Dry off brakes that have become wet by  
driving slowly, releasing the accelerator  
pedal and lightly applying the brakes  
several times until the brake performance  
returns to normal:  
4-96  
 
When Driving  
Brake  
An operation sound occurs when  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB)  
▼
applying or releasing the parking brake,  
however, this does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
If the EPB is not used for long periods,  
an automatic inspection of the system is  
performed while the vehicle is parked.  
An operation sound can be heard,  
however, this does not indicate a  
problem.  
The EPB equipment applies the parking  
brake using an electric motor. When the  
parking brake is applied, the EPB switch  
indicator light turns on.  
Indicator light  
When the parking brake is applied and  
the ignition is switched OFF, an  
operation sound can be heard, however,  
this does not indicate a problem.  
The brake pedal may move while the  
parking brake is being applied or  
released, however, this does not indicate  
a problem.  
If the EPB switch is continually pulled  
while driving the vehicle, the parking  
brake will be applied and the EPB  
warning beep will be activated. When  
the switch is released, the parking brake  
is released and the beep stops.  
If the parking brake is applied with the  
ignition switched off or in ACC, the EPB  
indicator light in the instrument cluster  
and the indicator light in the switch may  
turn on for 15 seconds.  
When running the vehicle through an  
automatic car wash, it may be necessary  
to switch the ignition off with the  
parking brake released depending on  
the type of automatic car wash.  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the parking  
brake applied:  
If the vehicle is driven with the parking  
brake applied, the brake parts may  
generate heat and the brake system may  
not operate, leading to an accident.  
Before driving, release the parking brake  
and verify that the EPB indicator light is  
turned off.  
NOTE  
The parking brake cannot be applied or  
released while the vehicle battery is  
dead.  
If the EPB is repeatedly applied and  
When applying the parking brake  
released it may stop operating to  
prevent overheating of the motor. If this  
occurs, wait approx. 1 minute before  
operating the EPB switch again.  
The parking brake can be applied  
regardless of the ignition switch position.  
Securely depress the brake pedal and pull  
up the EPB switch.  
4-97  
 
When Driving  
Brake  
The parking brake is applied and the EPB  
indicator light and the EPB switch  
indicator light turn on.  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or  
Flashes on page 7-22.  
notifies the driver that the brake is not  
depressed.  
(Type A/B instrument cluster)  
A message is displayed on the  
multi-information display in the  
instrument cluster.  
Refer to Message Indicated in  
Multi-information Display on page 7-37.  
(Type C instrument cluster)  
The brake pedal operation demand  
indicator light (green) in the instrument  
cluster turns on.  
(Green)  
When releasing the parking brake  
The parking brake can be released while  
the ignition is switched ON or the engine  
is running. When the parking brake is  
released, the EPB indicator light and the  
EPB switch indicator light turn off.  
Parking brake automatic release  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed with  
the parking brake applied and all of the  
following conditions met, the parking  
brake is released automatically.  
Parking brake manual release  
The engine is running.  
The driver's door is closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
Firmly depress the brake pedal and press  
the EPB switch.  
Selector lever is in the D, M, or R  
position  
NOTE  
If something such as the driver's foot  
contacts the accelerator pedal with the  
engine running and the parking brake  
applied, the parking brake may be  
released automatically. If you do not  
intend to drive immediately, shift the  
selector lever to the P or N position.  
If the EPB switch is pressed without  
depressing the brake pedal, the display or  
indicator light in the instrument cluster  
4-98  
When Driving  
Brake  
Warning Light  
Brake Assist  
▼
▼
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer and  
Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
During emergency braking situations  
when it is necessary to depress the brake  
pedal with greater force, the brake assist  
system provides braking assistance, thus  
enhancing braking performance.  
Brake Pad Wear Indicator  
▼
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply  
more firmly.  
When the disc brake pads become worn,  
the built-in wear indicators contact the  
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise  
to warn that the pads should be replaced.  
NOTE  
When the brake pedal is depressed hard  
or depressed more quickly, the pedal  
will feel softer but the brakes will apply  
more firmly. This is a normal effect of  
the brake assist operation and does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
When the brake pedal is depressed hard  
or depressed more quickly, a motor/  
pump operation noise may be heard.  
This is a normal effect of the brake  
assist and does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
When you hear this noise, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
The brake assist equipment does not  
WARNING  
supersede the functionality of the  
vehicle's main braking system.  
Do not drive with worn disc pads:  
Driving with worn disc pads is dangerous.  
The brakes could fail and cause a serious  
accident. As soon as you hear a screeching  
noise consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
In high humidity weather conditions,  
brake noises, such as brake squeak or  
brake squeal can be heard. It does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
4-99  
When Driving  
Brake  
AUTOHOLD  
The AUTOHOLD function automatically holds the vehicle stopped, even if you take your  
foot off the brake pedal. This function can be best used while stopped in traffic or at a traffic  
light. The brakes are released when you start driving the vehicle.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the AUTOHOLD function:  
The AUTOHOLD function is only designed to assist the brake operation while the vehicle is  
stopped. Neglecting to operate the brakes and relying only on the AUTOHOLD system is  
dangerous and could result in an unexpected accident if the vehicle were to suddenly move.  
Operate the brakes appropriately in accordance with the road and surrounding conditions.  
Note that the vehicle may move suddenly depending on the vehicle's load or if it is towing  
something.  
Do not release your foot from the brake pedal while the vehicle is stopped on a steep grade:  
Because there is a possibility of the vehicle not being held in the stopped position by the  
AUTOHOLD function, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and result in an accident.  
Do not use the AUTOHOLD function on slippery roads such as icy or snow-covered roads, or  
unpaved roads:  
Even if the vehicle is held in the stopped position by the AUTOHOLD function, the vehicle may  
move unexpectedly and result in an accident. Operate the accelerator pedal, brakes, or  
steering wheel appropriately as necessary.  
Immediately depress the brake pedal in the following cases:  
Because the AUTOHOLD function is canceled forcibly, the vehicle may move unexpectedly  
and result in an accident.  
The brake pedal operation demand warning light (red) flashes and the warning sound is  
activated at the same time.  
(Red)  
[Brake Hold Unavailable Depress Brake to Hold Position] is displayed in the  
multi-information display and the warning sound is activated at the same time.  
4-100  
 
When Driving  
Brake  
Always apply the parking brake when parking the vehicle:  
Not applying the parking brake when parking the vehicle is dangerous as the vehicle may  
move unexpectedly and result in an accident. When parking the vehicle, shift the selector  
lever to the P position and apply the parking brake.  
CAUTION  
If you stop operating the accelerator pedal before the vehicle starts moving, the force holding  
the vehicle in the stopped position may weaken. Firmly depress the brake pedal or depress the  
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, a problem with the AUTOHOLD is occurring. Have your  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
The brake pedal operation demand warning light (red) in the instrument cluster flashes  
and the warning sound is activated for about 5 seconds while the AUTOHOLD is  
operating or when you press the AUTOHOLD switch.  
A message is indicated on the multi-information display and a warning sound is  
activated for about 5 seconds while the AUTOHOLD is operating or when your press  
the AUTOHOLD switch.  
If you switch the ignition OFF while the AUTOHOLD is operating, the parking brake is  
applied automatically to assist you with parking the vehicle.  
The AUTOHOLD is canceled when the selector lever is shifted to R position while the  
vehicle is on level ground, or facing up a hill or grade (as shown below).  
: Driving in reverse (selector lever in R)  
Vehicle tilts forward  
Level ground  
Vehicle tilts rearward  
AUTOHOLD :  
Operates  
AUTOHOLD :  
Does not operate,  
canceled  
AUTOHOLD :  
Does not operate,  
canceled  
4-101  
When Driving  
Brake  
The brake pedal response may change, sound may occur from the brakes, or the brake  
pedal could vibrate from the operation of the AUTOHOLD function. However, this does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
2. The AUTOHOLD active indicator  
light in the instrument cluster turns on  
and the brakes are held.  
To Turn On AUTOHOLD System  
▼
Press the AUTOHOLD switch and when  
the AUTOHOLD standby indicator light  
turns on, the AUTOHOLD function turns  
on.  
AUTOHOLD standby  
indicator light  
3. The vehicle is held in its stopped  
position even with the brake pedal  
released.  
NOTE  
When all of the following conditions are  
met, the AUTOHOLD operates and the  
brakes are held.  
NOTE  
The ignition is switched ON (engine is  
running).  
The vehicle is stopped.  
The brake pedal is being depressed.  
The AUTOHOLD active indicator light  
turns on.  
The accelerator pedal is not depressed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The driver's door is closed.  
There is no problem with the  
AUTOHOLD function.  
The parking brake is released.  
There is no problem with the Electric  
Parking Brake (EPB) function.  
The selector lever is in a position other  
When all of the following conditions are  
met, the AUTOHOLD standby indicator  
light turns on when the AUTOHOLD  
switch is pressed and the AUTOHOLD  
function turns on.  
The ignition is switched ON (engine is  
running).  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The driver's door is closed.  
There is no problem with the  
AUTOHOLD function.  
To operate AUTOHOLD and hold the  
brakes  
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the  
vehicle to a complete stop.  
than R position or the vehicle tilts  
forward with the selector lever in the R  
position.  
4-102  
 
When Driving  
Brake  
To release AUTOHOLD and start  
driving the vehicle  
To Turn Off AUTOHOLD System  
▼
Depress the brake pedal and press the  
AUTOHOLD switch. The AUTOHOLD is  
turned off and the AUTOHOLD standby  
indicator light turns off.  
If you try to resume driving the vehicle,  
the brakes release automatically and the  
AUTOHOLD active indicator light turns  
off.  
AUTOHOLD standby  
indicator light  
NOTE  
If the Electric Parking Brake (EPB)  
switch is pulled while the AUTOHOLD  
is operating, the parking brake is  
applied and the AUTOHOLD is  
released. In addition, if the parking  
brake is released under this condition,  
the AUTOHOLD operates to hold the  
brakes.  
Under the following conditions, the  
NOTE  
parking brake is automatically applied  
and the AUTOHOLD is released. The  
AUTOHOLD is re-enabled when the  
conditions before the AUTOHOLD is  
released are restored.  
When the brakes are not held such as  
while driving the vehicle, the  
AUTOHOLD can be turned off only by  
pressing the AUTOHOLD switch.  
(Type A/B instrument cluster)  
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.  
The driver’s door is opened.  
If the AUTOHOLD switch is pressed  
without depressing the brake pedal  
while AUTOHOLD is operating  
(AUTOHOLD active indicator light in  
instrument cluster is turned on), the  
message Brake Pedal Must Be  
Depressed to Deactivate Auto Hold  
System is indicated on the  
multi-information display to notify the  
driver to depress the brake pedal.  
When about 10 minutes or longer have  
passed since the AUTOHOLD operation  
started, the parking brake is  
automatically applied. Because the  
AUTOHOLD is restored when releasing  
the parking brake, the hold on the  
brakes by AUTOHOLD function  
resumes.  
4-103  
When Driving  
Brake  
(Type C instrument cluster)  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)  
If the AUTOHOLD switch is pressed  
without depressing the brake pedal  
while the AUTOHOLD is operating  
(AUTOHOLD active indicator light is  
turned on), the brake pedal operation  
demand indicator light (green) in the  
instrument cluster turns on to notify the  
driver that it is necessary to depress the  
brake pedal.  
HLA is a function which assists the driver  
in accelerating from a stop while on a  
slope. When the driver releases the brake  
pedal and depresses the accelerator pedal  
while on a slope, the function prevents the  
vehicle from rolling. The braking force is  
maintained automatically after the brake  
pedal is released on a steep grade.  
HLA operates on a downward slope when  
the selector lever is in the reverse (R)  
position, and on an upward slope when the  
selector lever is in a forward gear.  
(Green)  
WARNING  
If any of the following conditions occurs  
while the AUTOHOLD function is  
operating (AUTOHOLD active indicator  
light is turned on), the parking brake is  
applied automatically and the  
AUTOHOLD function turns off. For the  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB)  
Do not rely completely on HLA :  
HLA is an auxiliary device for accelerating  
from a stop on a slope. The system only  
operates for about 2 seconds and  
therefore, relying only on the system, when  
accelerating from a stop is dangerous  
because the vehicle may move (roll)  
unexpectedly and cause an accident.  
The vehicle could roll depending on the  
vehicle's load or if it is towing something.  
Always confirm the safety around the  
vehicle before starting to drive the vehicle.  
operation, refer to the Electric Parking  
Brake (EPB) on page 4-97.  
The ignition is switched OFF.  
There is a problem with the  
AUTOHOLD function.  
NOTE  
HLA does not operate on a gentle slope.  
In addition, the gradient of the slope on  
which the system will operate changes  
depending on the vehicle's load.  
HLA does not operate if the parking  
brake is applied, or if the vehicle has not  
stopped completely.  
HLA is operating, the brake pedal may  
feel stiff and vibrate, however, this does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
4-104  
 
When Driving  
Brake  
HLA does not operate while the  
TCS/DSC indicator light is illuminated.  
Refer to Contact an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected on  
page 7-25.  
HLA does not turn off even if the TCS  
OFF switch is pressed to turn off the  
TCS.  
4-105  
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
NOTE  
Antilock Brake System  
Braking distances may be longer on  
(ABS)  
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for  
example) which usually have a hard  
foundation. A vehicle with a normal  
braking system may require less  
distance to stop under these conditions  
because the tires will build up a wedge  
of surface layer when the wheels skid.  
The sound of the ABS operating may be  
heard when starting the engine or  
immediately after starting the vehicle,  
however, it does not indicate a  
The ABS control unit continuously  
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one  
wheel is about to lock up, the ABS  
responds by automatically releasing and  
reapplying that wheel's brake.  
The driver will feel a slight vibration in  
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering  
noise from the brake system. This is  
normal ABS system operation. Continue  
to depress the brake pedal without  
pumping the brakes.  
malfunction.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer and  
Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for safe  
driving:  
The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe  
and reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle too  
closely), driving on ice and snow, and  
hydroplaning (reduced tire friction and  
road contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an accident.  
4-106  
 
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
NOTE  
Traction Control System  
To turn off the TCS, press the TCS OFF  
switch (page 4-108).  
(TCS)  
The Traction Control System (TCS)  
enhances traction and safety by controlling  
engine torque and braking. When the TCS  
detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers  
engine torque and operates the brakes to  
prevent loss of traction.  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
▼
This means that on a slick surface, the  
engine adjusts automatically to provide  
optimum power to the drive wheels,  
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.  
If the TCS or DSC is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the  
brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer and  
Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Do not rely on the Traction Control System  
(TCS) as a substitute for safe driving:  
The Traction Control System (TCS) cannot  
compensate for unsafe and reckless  
In addition to the indicator light  
flashing, a slight lugging sound will  
come from the engine. This indicates  
that the TCS/DSC is operating properly.  
driving, excessive speed, tailgating  
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh  
(following another vehicle too closely), and  
hydroplaning (reduced tire friction and  
road contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an accident.  
snow, it will be impossible to achieve  
high rpm when the TCS is on.  
TCS OFF Indicator Light*  
▼
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at  
reduced speeds when roads are covered  
with ice and/or snow:  
Driving without proper traction devices on  
snow and/or ice-covered roads is  
dangerous. The Traction Control System  
(TCS) alone cannot provide adequate  
traction and you could still have an  
accident.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.  
It also illuminates when the TCS OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.  
*Some models.  
4-107  
     
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 4-108.  
If the TCS OFF switch is pressed and  
held for 10 seconds or more, the TCS  
OFF switch malfunction detection  
function operates and the TCS system  
activates automatically. The TCS OFF  
indicator light turns off while the TCS  
system is operative.  
If the light remains illuminated and the  
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The DSC  
may have a malfunction.  
TCS OFF Switch*  
▼
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the  
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light in the  
instrument cluster will illuminate.  
Press the switch again to turn the TCS  
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light will  
turn off.  
NOTE  
When the TCS is on and you attempt to  
free the vehicle from being stuck, the  
TCS will activate. Depressing the  
accelerator will not increase engine  
power and freeing the vehicle from  
being stuck might be difficult. When this  
happens, turn off the TCS.  
If the TCS is off when the engine is  
turned off, it automatically activates  
when the ignition is switched ON.  
Leaving the TCS on will provide the best  
traction.  
*Some models.  
4-108  
 
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
Use tires of the same manufacturer,  
brand and tread pattern on all 4  
wheels.  
Do not mix worn tires.  
The DSC may not operate correctly when  
tire chains are used or a temporary spare  
tire is installed because the tire diameter  
changes.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
(DSC)  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
automatically controls braking and engine  
torque in conjunction with systems such as  
ABS and TCS to help control side slip  
when driving on slippery surfaces, or  
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,  
enhancing vehicle safety.  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
▼
Refer to ABS (page 4-106) and TCS (page  
4-107).  
DSC operation is possible at speeds  
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.  
If the TCS or DSC is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer and  
Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the  
brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability  
Control as a substitute for safe driving:  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless  
driving, excessive speed, tailgating  
(following another vehicle too closely), and  
hydroplaning (reduced tire friction and  
road contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an accident.  
CAUTION  
The DSC may not operate correctly  
unless the following are observed:  
Use tires of the correct size specified for  
your Mazda on all 4 wheels.  
4-109  
   
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
If the vehicle is driven continuously with  
Off-Road Traction Assist*  
the Off-Road Traction Assist on, the AWD  
warning indication may be displayed.  
(Vehicle equipped with Type C instrument  
cluster)  
If the vehicle is driven continuously with  
the Off-Road Traction Assist on, the AWD  
warning light may flash.  
When the vehicle tires become embedded  
in mud, sand, or deep snow, the Off-Road  
Traction Assist functions to prevent  
drive-wheel spinning and to assist in  
freeing tires that are stuck.  
Do not drive over rough rocky roads and  
river beds.  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or  
Flashes on page 7-22.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
The vehicle may vibrate or you might hear  
an operation sound while the Off-Road  
Traction Assist is operating or is  
operational, however, this does not  
indicate a problem.  
Do not rely completely on the Off-Road  
Traction Assist.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist has  
limitations. Always drive the vehicle safely  
according to the road conditions. Do not  
drive the vehicle recklessly, otherwise it  
may result in an accident. In addition, do  
not drive the vehicle under the following  
conditions while the Off-Road Traction  
Assist is operating. Otherwise, it could  
negatively affect the drivetrain parts which  
could result in an accident.  
Off-Road Traction Assist Indicator  
Light  
▼
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
indicator light turns on and then turns  
off after a few seconds.  
When pressing the Off-Road Traction  
Assist switch to operate the Off-Road  
Traction Assist, the indicator light turns  
on.  
A problem in the system might be  
indicated under the following  
conditions. Have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Vehicle is driven on paved roads.  
Temporary spare tire or tires of a  
different specified size are used.  
Tire chains are used.  
CAUTION  
The Off-Road Traction Assist is a function  
to assist in freeing tires that are stuck.  
When it is not necessary to use this  
function, avoid driving the vehicle  
continuously with the Off-Road Traction  
Assist on.  
The indicator light does not turn on  
when the ignition is switched ON or it  
remains on.  
The indicator light turns on even  
(Vehicle equipped with Type A/B  
instrument cluster)  
though the Off-Road Traction Assist  
was not operated.  
*Some models.  
4-110  
   
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC/Off-Road Traction Assist  
Off-Road Traction Assist Switch  
▼
When the switch is pressed after stopping  
the vehicle, the Off-Road Traction Assist  
becomes operational.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist indicator  
light in the instrument cluster turn on.  
If the switch is pressed again, the  
Off-Road Traction Assist is stopped and  
the Off-Road Traction Assist indicator  
light turn off.  
NOTE  
If the engine is stopped with the Off-Road  
Traction Assist operational, the Off-Road  
Traction Assist is stopped when the engine  
is started the next time.  
4-111  
When Driving  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive)  
Always drive the vehicle safely. Do not  
drive the vehicle recklessly, otherwise it  
may result in an accident.  
Use Off-road mode when driving on  
slippery roads such as muddy, sandy, or  
deep-snowy roads. During normal  
driving, use normal mode.  
Mazda intelligent Drive  
Select (Mi-Drive)  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select  
(Mi-Drive)  
▼
Mi-drive is a system that switches the  
drive modes depending on the driving  
conditions, road conditions and vehicle  
conditions.  
CAUTION  
The mode can be switched from normal to  
sport or off-road.  
Do not use the sport mode when driving  
on slippery roads such as wet or  
snow-covered roads. It may cause tire  
slipping.  
Heed the following cautions so that the  
system can operate normally.  
Sport mode  
This mode enhances vehicle  
responsiveness when the accelerator pedal  
is depressed.  
Always use tires of the specified size,  
same manufacturer, brand, and  
pattern (tread pattern) for the front  
and rear wheels.  
This provides additional quick  
acceleration which may be needed to  
safely make maneuvers such as lane  
changes, merging onto freeways, or  
passing other vehicles.  
Do not use tires with significantly  
different wear patterns on the same  
vehicle.  
Drive carefully when using tire chains.  
Because the diameter of the tires differs,  
the system may not operate normally.  
*
Off-road mode  
This mode helps prevent drive-wheel  
spinning during off-road driving and  
improves driving performance.  
And this mode also assists in freeing tires  
that are stuck.  
Use this mode to drive the vehicle on  
slippery roads such as muddy, sandy, or  
deep-snowy roads.  
Warnings and cautions when using  
Mi-Drive  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the Mi-Drive  
system.  
Vehicle stability is limited even when  
Mi-drive is activated.  
*Some models.  
4-112  
   
When Driving  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive)  
How to use Mi-Drive  
Type A  
Type B  
1. Press the Mi-Drive switch forward  
(SPORT) to select the sport mode.  
1. Push the Mi-Drive switch forward or  
pull it toward you.  
2. Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
When the drive mode is set, the display  
in the instrument cluster changes.  
Refer to Mazda intelligent Drive Select  
(Mi-Drive) Display on page 4-21.  
Instrument Cluster (Type B/C)  
When the sport mode is selected, the  
select mode indication turns on in the  
instrument cluster.  
2. While checking the list displayed in  
the instrument cluster, push the  
Mi-Drive switch forward or pull it  
toward you to select a drive mode.  
3. Pull the Mi-Drive switch back (OFF)  
to cancel the sport mode.  
NOTE  
When the drive mode is set, the display  
in the instrument cluster changes.  
Refer to Mazda intelligent Drive Select  
(Mi-Drive) Display on page 4-21.  
Depending on the driving conditions  
when sport mode is selected, the vehicle  
may perform shift-down or slightly  
accelerate.  
When the sport mode is selected, driving  
at higher engine speeds increases and it  
may increase fuel consumption. Mazda  
recommends that you cancel the sport  
mode on normal driving.  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
The driving mode in which the display in  
the instrument cluster is grayed out  
cannot be selected.  
4-113  
When Driving  
Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive)  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the  
mode returns to normal mode.  
In the following cases, the sport mode is  
canceled.  
The ignition is switched OFF.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)  
system/cruise control is set.  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) is set.  
The vehicle may vibrate or you might  
hear an operation sound while the  
Off-road mode is operating or is  
operational, however, this does not  
indicate a problem.  
4-114  
When Driving  
i-ACTIV AWD  
Utility and AWD vehicles are not designed  
for cornering at high speeds any more than  
low profile sports cars are designed to  
perform satisfactorily under off-road  
conditions. In addition, utility vehicles have  
a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles.  
i-ACTIV AWD Operation*  
AWD provides excellent drivability on  
snow-covered and ice-packed roads, sand  
and mud, as well as on steep slopes and  
other slippery surfaces.  
A system malfunction or operation  
conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer and  
Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
Drive carefully when the vehicle is loaded  
by lowering vehicle speed and applying the  
brakes earlier:  
Abrupt maneuvering and sudden braking  
when driving a loaded vehicle is dangerous  
as the driving behavior of a vehicle with a  
high center of gravity is different when it is  
loaded compared to when it is not, and  
could result in the loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
WARNING  
Never spin a wheel that is off the ground:  
Spinning a wheel that is off the ground as a  
result of the vehicle being stuck or in a  
ditch is dangerous. The drive assembly  
could be seriously damaged which could  
lead to an accident or could even lead to  
overheating, oil leakage, and a fire.  
Tires and Tire Chains  
▼
The condition of the tires plays a large role  
in the performance of the vehicle.  
AWD Driving  
▼
Moreover, to prevent adverse effects to the  
drive assembly, please note the following:  
WARNING  
Tires  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and  
abrupt maneuvers when driving this  
vehicle:  
When replacing tires, always replace all  
front and rear tires at the same time.  
All tires must be of the same size,  
Sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvering of this vehicle is dangerous  
as it could result in the increased risk of loss  
of vehicle control, vehicle roll-over,  
personal injury or death.  
This vehicle has a higher center of gravity.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity  
such as utility and AWD vehicles handle  
differently than vehicles with a lower center  
of gravity.  
manufacture, brand and tread pattern.  
Pay particular attention when equipping  
snow or other types of winter tires.  
Do not mix tread-worn tires with normal  
tires.  
Inspect tire inflation pressures at the  
specified periods adjust to the specified  
pressures, and initialize the tire pressure  
monitoring system.  
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System Initialization on page 4-276.  
*Some models.  
4-115  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIV AWD  
NOTE  
Check the tire inflation pressure label  
attached to driver's door frame for the  
correct tire inflation pressure.  
Make sure to equip the vehicle with  
genuine tires of the specified size, on all  
wheels. With AWD, the system is  
calibrated for all 4 wheels being of the  
same dimensions.  
Tire chains  
Install tire chains to the front tires.  
Do not use tire chains on the rear  
wheels.  
Do not drive the vehicle faster than 30  
km/h (19 mph) with the tire chains  
installed.  
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains  
on road conditions other than snow or  
ice.  
Towing  
▼
If the vehicle requires towing, have it  
towed with all 4 wheels completely off the  
ground.  
Refer to Towing Description on page  
7-19.  
4-116  
When Driving  
Power Steering  
Power Steering  
Power steering is only operable when  
the engine is running. If the engine is off  
or if the power steering system is  
inoperable, you can still steer, but it  
requires more physical effort.  
If the steering feels stiffer than usual  
during normal driving or the steering  
vibrates, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The warning indication/warning light  
notifies the driver of system  
abnormalities and operation conditions.  
In addition, the buzzer may also activate  
depending on the system abnormality or  
operation condition.  
Refer to Stop Vehicle in Safe Place  
Immediately on page 7-22.  
Refer to Power Steering Warning  
Buzzer on page 7-44.  
CAUTION  
Never hold the steering wheel to the  
extreme left or right for more than 5  
seconds with the engine running. This  
could damage the power steering system.  
4-117  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
i-ACTIVSENSE*  
i-ACTIVSENSE is a collective term covering a series of advanced safety and driver support  
systems which make use of a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and radar sensors. These  
systems consist of active safety and pre-crash safety systems.  
These systems are designed to assist the driver in safer driving by reducing the load on the  
driver and helping to avert collisions or reduce their severity. However, because each system  
has its limitations, always drive carefully and do not rely solely on the systems.  
Active Safety Technology  
▼
Active Safety Technology supports safer driving by helping the driver to recognize potential  
hazards and avert accidents.  
Driver awareness support systems  
Nighttime visibility  
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)...................................................................page 4-121  
High Beam Control System (HBC)......................................................................... page 4-122  
Left/right side and rear side detection  
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)..............................................................page 4-177  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM).................................................................................page 4-125  
Road sign recognition  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)..................................................................page 4-130  
Inter-vehicle distance recognition  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS).......................................................page 4-136  
Driver fatigue detection  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)................................................................................. page 4-140  
Rear obstruction detection when leaving a parking space  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).............................................................................page 4-142  
Full-surround recognition  
360°View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A)).......................................................page 4-204  
360°View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))....................................................... page 4-231  
*Some models.  
4-118  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Driver support systems  
Inter-vehicle distance  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function)................................................................................................................... page 4-146  
Lane departure  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)..............................................................................page 4-177  
Inter-vehicle distance and lane keeping  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)..........................................................................................page 4-161  
Pre-Crash Safety Technology  
▼
Pre-crash safety technology is designed to assist the driver in averting collisions or reduce  
their severity in situations where they cannot be avoided.  
Collision damage reduction in low vehicle speed range  
Forward driving  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F)......................................................page 4-194  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)........................................page 4-191  
Reverse driving  
Smart City Brake Support [Reverse] (SCBS R)......................................................page 4-198  
Collision damage reduction in medium/high speed range  
Smart Brake Support (SBS).....................................................................................page 4-202  
Camera and Sensors  
▼
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects lane indications and recognizes headlights,  
taillights and city lights during nighttime driving. In addition, it also detects the vehicle  
ahead, pedestrians, or obstructions. The following systems also use the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F)  
4-119  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed at the top of the windshield near the  
rearview mirror.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-259.  
Radar sensor (front)  
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead  
sent from the radar sensor. The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the radiator grille.  
Refer to Radar Sensor (Front) on page 4-264.  
Radar sensors (rear)  
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle  
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensors. The following  
systems also use the radar sensors (rear).  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)  
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right  
sides.  
Refer to Radar Sensors (Rear) on page 4-267.  
Ultrasonic sensors (rear)  
The ultrasonic sensors (rear) function by detecting the ultrasonic waves reflected off  
obstructions at the rear sent from the ultrasonic sensors. The following systems also use the  
ultrasonic sensors (rear).  
Smart City Brake Support [Reverse] (SCBS R)  
The ultrasonic sensors (rear) are mounted in the rear bumper.  
Refer to Ultrasonic Sensors (Rear) on page 4-269.  
Front camera/side cameras/rear view camera  
The front camera, side cameras, and rear camera shoot images of the area surrounding the  
vehicle. The 360° View Monitor uses each camera.  
Cameras are installed to the front bumper, door mirrors, and liftgate.  
Refer to Front Camera/Side Cameras/Rear Camera on page 4-270.  
4-120  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)*  
The adaptive front lighting system (AFS) automatically adjusts the headlight beams to the  
left or right in conjunction with the operation of the steering wheel after the headlights have  
been turned on.  
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Refer to Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
NOTE  
The Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) function can be switched to operable/inoperable  
using the personalization function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
*Some models.  
4-121  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
High Beam Control System (HBC)*  
The HBC determines the conditions in front of the vehicle using the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC) while driving in darkness to automatically switch the headlights between  
high and low beams.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-259.  
While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, the headlights are  
switched to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite  
direction.  
The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs:  
The system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in the  
opposite direction.  
The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and  
towns.  
The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).  
The recognition distance of the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
varies according to the  
surrounding conditions.  
Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC)  
The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction.  
Refer to Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
CAUTION  
Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the camera,  
otherwise the system will not operate normally.  
Do not rely excessively on the HBC and drive the vehicle while paying sufficient attention to  
safety. Switch the headlights between the high beams and low beams manually if  
necessary.  
*Some models.  
4-122  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following  
conditions. If the system does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch  
between high and low beams according to the visibility as well as road and traffic  
conditions.  
When there are sources of light in the area such as streetlamps, illuminated signboards,  
and traffic signals.  
When there are reflective objects in the surrounding area such as reflective plates and  
signs.  
When visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.  
When driving on roads with sharp turn or hilly terrain.  
When the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim  
or not illuminated.  
When there is sufficient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.  
When the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats  
are occupied.  
When visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires  
onto your windshield.  
NOTE  
To Operate the System  
▼
When the vehicle speed is about 30 km/h  
The HBC operates to switch the headlights  
automatically between high and low  
beams after the ignition is switched ON  
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO  
and high beam position.  
The HBC determines that it is dark based  
on the brightness of the surrounding area.  
At the same time, the HBC indicator light  
(green) in the instrument cluster  
illuminates.  
(19 mph) or more, the headlights  
automatically switch to high beams  
when there are no vehicles ahead or  
approaching in the opposite direction.  
When the vehicle speed is less than  
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the HBC  
switches the headlights to low beams.  
The low beams may not switch to high  
beams when cornering.  
Operation of the HBC function can be  
disabled. Refer to the Settings section in  
the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Manual Switching  
▼
Switching to low beams  
Shift the lever to the low beam position.  
The HBC indicator light (green) turns off.  
4-123  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Switching to high beams  
Turn the headlight switch to the  
position.  
The HBC indicator light (green) turns off  
and the  
is illuminated.  
4-124  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)*  
The BSM is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the rear of the vehicle on  
both sides during lane changes by notifying the driver of the presence of vehicles  
approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane.  
The BSM detects vehicles approaching from the rear while traveling in the forward  
direction at a speed of 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster and notifies the driver by turning on the  
BSM warning indicator light and displaying the vehicle detection screen (vehicles with  
instrument cluster (Type A/B) and active driving display).  
If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction in which the BSM  
warning indicator light is illuminated while the approaching vehicle is detected, the BSM  
notifies the driver of possible danger by turning on the BSM warning indicator light, and by  
activating the warning sound and the warning screen indicator display (vehicles with  
instrument cluster (Type A/B) and active driving display).  
The detection area on this system covers the driving lanes on both sides of the vehicle and  
from the rear part of the front doors to about 50 m (164 ft) behind the vehicle.  
Your vehicle  
Detection areas  
WARNING  
Always check the surrounding area visually before making an actual lane change:  
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when making a  
lane change. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the BSM warning  
indicator light, the warning sound and the warning screen indicator display may not activate  
or they might be delayed even though a vehicle is in an adjacent driving lane. Always make it  
your responsibility as a driver to check the rear.  
*Some models.  
4-125  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The BSM will operate when all of the following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The BSM OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster is turned off.  
The vehicle speed is about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster.  
The BSM will not operate under the following circumstances.  
The vehicle speed falls below about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) even though the BSM OFF  
indicator light is turned off.  
The selector lever is shifted to reverse (R) and the vehicle is reversing.  
The turning radius is small (making a sharp turn, turning at intersections).  
In the following cases, the BSM OFF indicator light turns on and operation of the system  
is stopped. If the BSM OFF indicator light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected  
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Some problem with the system including the BSM warning indicator lights is detected.  
A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has  
occurred.  
There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor  
(rear). Remove any snow, ice or mud on the rear bumper.  
Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods.  
The temperature near the radar sensors (rear) becomes extremely hot due to driving for  
long periods on slopes during the summer.  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it  
may be difficult to detect them.  
A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but it does not  
approach. The BSM determines the condition based on radar detection data.  
A vehicle is traveling alongside your vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended  
period of time.  
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction.  
A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane is attempting to pass your vehicle.  
A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a road with extremely wide driving lanes. The  
detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set at the road width of expressways.  
In the following case, the flashing of the BSM warning indicator light, and the activation  
of the warning sound and the warning screen indicator display may not occur or they may  
be delayed.  
A vehicle makes a lane change from a driving lane two lanes over to an adjacent lane.  
Driving on steep slopes.  
Crossing the summit of a hill or mountain pass.  
4-126  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When there is a difference in the height between your driving lane and the adjacent  
lane.  
Directly after the BSM system becomes operable by changing the setting.  
If the road width is extremely narrow, vehicles two lanes over may be detected. The  
detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set according to the road width of  
expressways.  
The BSM warning indicator light may turn on and the vehicle detection screen may be  
displayed in the display in reaction to stationary objects (guardrails, tunnels, sidewalls,  
and parked vehicles) on the road or the roadside.  
Objects such as guardrails and concrete walls  
running alongside the vehicle.  
Places where the width between guardrails or  
walls on each side of the vehicle narrows.  
The walls at the entrance and exits of tunnels  
and turnouts.  
A BSM warning indicator light may flash or the warning beep may be activated several  
times when making a turn at a city intersection.  
Turn off the BSM while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is  
installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s radio waves will be blocked  
causing the system to not operate normally.  
In the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the BSM  
warning indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors.  
Snow or ice is adhering to the door mirrors.  
The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.  
The radar sensors (rear) of the BSM may be regulated under the radio wave related laws  
of the country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this system are approved for use  
in the U.S.A. (including territories), Canada, and Mexico. If a vehicle with a BSM is  
driven in a country other than the U.S.A., Canada, or Mexico, the system has to be turned  
off by changing the setting on the center display.  
The system switches to the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) function when the selector  
lever is shifted to the reverse (R) position.  
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-142.  
4-127  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Indicator Light/Display Indicator/Blind  
Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Beep  
▼
The BSM or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system notifies the driver of the presence of  
vehicles in adjacent lanes or at the rear of the vehicle using the BSM warning indicator  
light, the warning sound and the display indicator (vehicles with instrument cluster (Type  
A/B) and active driving display) (BSM) while the systems are operational.  
BSM warning indicator lights  
The BSM warning indicator lights are equipped on the left and right door mirrors. The  
warning indicator lights turn on when a vehicle approaching from the rear in an adjacent  
lane is detected.  
When the ignition is switched ON, the warning indicator light turns on momentarily and  
then turns off after a few seconds.  
Forward driving (BSM operation)  
The BSM detects vehicles approaching from the rear and turns on the BSM warning  
indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors according to the conditions. Additionally,  
while a BSM warning indicator light is illuminated, if the turn signal lever is operated to  
signal a turn in the direction in which the BSM warning indicator light is illuminated, the  
BSM warning indicator light flashes.  
Reverse driving (Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operation)  
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects a vehicle approaching from the rear of  
the vehicle and flashes the BSM warning indicator lights.  
Function for cancelling illumination dimmer  
If the BSM warning indicator lights turn on when the parking lights are turned on, the  
brightness of the BSM warning indicator lights is dimmed.  
4-128  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the BSM warning indicator lights are difficult to see due to glare from surrounding  
brightness when traveling on snow-covered roads or under foggy conditions, press the  
dimmer cancellation button to cancel the dimmer and increase the brightness of BSM  
warning indicator lights when they turn on.  
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-18, 4-36, 4-50.  
Display indicator (Vehicles with multi-information display and active driving display)  
The detected approaching vehicle and warning are displayed in the multi-information  
display and active driving display when the vehicle is moving forward (BSM operational).  
Multi-information Display  
Active Driving Display  
Instrument Cluster (Type A/B)  
Detection and warning indicator  
Detection and warning indicator  
The detected direction is displayed with a detection indicator (white) when an approaching  
vehicle is detected. In addition, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change  
while the vehicle is detected, the display changes the color (amber) of the warning indicator.  
BSM warning beep  
The BSM warning beep is activated simultaneously with the flashing of a BSM warning  
indicator light.  
NOTE  
Canceling Operation of Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM)  
▼
When the ignition is switched OFF, the  
system status before it was turned off is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is  
switched OFF while the BSM and Rear  
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems are  
operational, the BSM and Rear Cross  
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems remain  
operational the next time the ignition is  
switched ON.  
The BSM system can be set to inoperable.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the BSM is set to inoperable, the  
BSM and Rear Cross Traffic Alert  
(RCTA) systems are turned off and the  
BSM OFF indicator light in the instrument  
cluster turns on.  
4-129  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)*  
The TSR helps prevent the driver from overlooking traffic signs, and provides support for  
safer driving by displaying traffic signs on the active driving display which are recognized  
by the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or recorded in the navigation system while the  
vehicle is driven.  
The TSR displays the speed limit, do not enter, and traffic stop signs.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign indicated in the active driving display while  
the vehicle is driven, the system notifies the driver using the indication in the active driving  
display and a warning sound.  
NOTE  
The TSR is not supported in some countries or regions. For information concerning the  
supported countries or regions, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The TSR operates only if the navigation system SD card (Mazda genuine) is inserted in  
the SD card slot. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.  
Speed limit signs and do not enter signs  
Sign displayed  
Sign recognized  
Active driving display indication  
Active driving display indication  
40  
40  
*Some models.  
4-130  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Stop sign  
Sign recognized and  
displayed at same time  
Active driving display indication  
40  
WARNING  
Always check the traffic signs visually while driving.  
The TSR helps prevent the driver from overlooking traffic signs and provides support for safer  
driving. Depending on the weather conditions or problems with traffic signs, a traffic sign  
may not be recognized or a traffic sign different from the actual traffic sign may be displayed.  
Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the actual traffic signs. Otherwise, it  
could result in an accident.  
NOTE  
The TSR does not operate if there is a malfunction in the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Under the following conditions, the TSR may not operate normally.  
An object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the  
camera.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the  
vehicle is tilted.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.  
Tires other than standard tires are equipped.  
The vehicle is driven on the ramp and surrounding area to or from a rest area or a  
tollgate on a highway.  
When surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a  
tunnel.  
4-131  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is  
deviated.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
The windshield and camera are fogged (water droplets).  
Strong light is directed at the front of the vehicle (such as backlight or high-beam  
headlights of on-coming vehicles).  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn.  
Strong light reflects off the road.  
A traffic sign is in a position which makes it difficult to reflect the light from the  
vehicle's headlights, such as when the vehicle is driven at night or in a tunnel.  
The vehicle is driven under weather conditions such as rain, fog, or snow.  
The stored map data for the navigation system is not current.  
A traffic sign is obscured by mud or snow.  
A traffic sign is concealed by trees or a vehicle.  
A traffic sign is partially shaded.  
A traffic sign is bent or warped.  
A traffic sign is too low or too high.  
A traffic sign is too bright or too dark (including electronic traffic signs).  
A traffic sign is too big or too small.  
There is an object similar to the traffic sign being read (such as another traffic sign or  
other signs resembling it).  
The TSR does not operate if the active driving display is set to non-display.  
The TSR can be set to inoperable.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Stop signs  
Traffic Sign Display Indication  
▼
The following traffic signs are displayed  
on the active driving display.  
Speed limit signs  
NOTE  
Speed limit signs  
When the vehicle speed is about 1 km/h  
Do not enter signs  
(0.6 mph) or faster, the speed limit sign  
is displayed when any one of the  
following conditions are met.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a speed limit sign as a sign  
targeted for your vehicle and the  
vehicle passes it.  
4-132  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The speed limit sign stored in the  
navigation system is read (if the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) does  
not recognize a speed limit sign).  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a do not enter sign as a  
sign targeted for your vehicle and the  
vehicle passes it.  
In the following cases, display of the  
speed limit sign stops.  
When the Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) recognizes the do not enter sign  
and a certain period of time has elapsed  
since the vehicle passed the sign, display  
of the do not enter sign stops.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes the speed limit sign and the  
vehicle is driven for a certain distance  
after passing the sign.  
Each sensor determines that the  
vehicle has changed direction of  
travel.  
Stop sign  
A stop sign is displayed when all of the  
following conditions are met:  
The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h  
(19 mph) or slower.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a stop sign as a sign  
targeted for your vehicle.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a new speed limit sign  
which differs from the previous one  
(displays the new speed limit sign).  
The speed limit sign stored in the  
When a certain period of time has  
elapsed since the stop sign was  
displayed, display of the stop sign stops.  
navigation system is not read within a  
certain period of time (if the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) does not  
recognize a speed limit sign, the speed  
limit sign stored in the navigation  
system is displayed).  
The vehicle speed exceeds the  
displayed speed limit sign by 30 km/h  
(19 mph) or more after a certain  
period of time has elapsed since the  
speed limit sign was displayed.  
(Except when there is information for  
the speed limit sign in the navigation  
system)  
Do not enter signs  
A do not enter sign is displayed when all  
of the following conditions are met.  
The vehicle speed is about 60 km/h  
(37 mph) or slower.  
4-133  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Excessive Speed Warning  
▼
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in the active driving display, the  
area around the speed limit sign flashes 3 times in amber and the warning sound is activated  
3 times at the same time. If the vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit  
sign, the indication stops flashing and remains on. Check the surrounding conditions and  
adjust the vehicle speed to the legal speed using the appropriate operation such as  
depressing the brake pedal.  
50 mph is displayed  
While 60 mph is displayed  
Active driving display indication  
Active driving display indication  
The excessive speed warning is initially set to inoperable. If you want to activate the  
excessive speed warning, change the setting in the personalization features. In addition, the  
warning pattern and the warning activation timing differ depending on the setting contents.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Warning pattern  
Off: The excessive speed warning is not activated.  
Visual: The area around the speed limit sign displayed in the display flashes 3 times in  
amber, and if the vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit sign, the  
indication stops flashing and remains on.  
Audio & Visual: The area around the speed limit sign displayed in the display flashes 3  
times in amber and the warning sound is activated 3 times at the same time. If the vehicle  
speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit sign, the indication stops flashing and  
remains on.  
Warning activation timing  
0: If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in the display, the  
excessive speed warning is activated.  
5: If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in the display by 5 km/h  
(3 mph), the excessive speed warning is activated.  
4-134  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
10: If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in the display by 10  
km/h (5 mph), the excessive speed warning is activated.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the excessive speed warning stops operating.  
The vehicle speed is less than the speed of the displayed speed limit sign. (If the  
activation timing for the excessive speed warning is changed in the personalization  
features, the excessive speed warning stops operating when the vehicle speed is less  
than the changed vehicle speed.  
A speed limit sign indication has been updated and the vehicle speed is lower than the  
updated indication.  
Display of the speed limit sign stops.  
The warning indication is displayed at the same time the excessive speed warning sound  
is activated if the vehicle speed exceeds the speed indicated on the speed limit sign.  
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7-41.  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) incorrectly recognizes the actual speed limit sign  
at a lower speed, the excessive speed alarm is activated even if the vehicle is driven at the  
legal speed.  
4-135  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)*  
The DRSS measures the distance between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead using a radar  
sensor (front) while the vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) or faster, and if your  
vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead more closely than what is appropriate for maintaining  
distance between the vehicles according to the vehicle speed, a notification in the  
multi-information display is indicated to advise you to keep a safe distance from the vehicle  
ahead.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the DRSS and always drive carefully:  
The ability to detect a vehicle ahead is limited depending on the type of vehicle ahead, the  
weather conditions, and the traffic conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator and brake pedals  
are not operated correctly it could lead to an accident. Always verify the safety of the  
surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safer  
distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.  
NOTE  
The DRSS operates when all of the following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The DRSS is on.  
The selector lever is in a position other than reverse (R).  
The vehicle speed is 30 km/h or faster (19 mph or faster).  
The objects which activate the system are 4-wheeled vehicles.  
The DRSS may also operate in the presence of motorcycles and bicycles.  
The DRSS may not operate normally under the following conditions:  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) has a malfunction.  
The vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed.  
The system does not operate with the following objects:  
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction.  
Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)  
Indication on Display  
▼
The DRSS operation status is indicated in the multi-information display. Regarding  
malfunctions, check the vehicle conditions or have it inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer according to the content of the displayed message.  
*Some models.  
4-136  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched off, the operation status before the system was turned off is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched off with the DRSS operable, the  
system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next time.  
The DRSS can be turned on/off and the system's sensitivity can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Multi-information display  
Instrument Cluster  
(Type A)  
Instrument Cluster  
(Type B)  
Vehicle ahead  
display  
Vehicle ahead  
display  
4-137  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
*1  
Distance-between-vehicles guide lines  
Indication on display  
Distance be‐  
tween vehicles  
guide lines  
Distance be‐  
tween vehicles  
guide lines  
Multi-information display  
(During travel at (During travel at  
about 40 km/h about 80 km/h  
Instrument cluster (Type A) Instrument cluster (Type B)  
(25 mph)  
(50 mph)  
About 25 m (82 About 50 m (164  
ft) ft)  
About 20 m (66 About 40 m (131  
ft) ft)  
About 15 m (49 About 30 m (98  
ft) ft)  
4-138  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Indication on display  
Distance be‐  
tween vehicles  
guide lines  
Distance be‐  
tween vehicles  
guide lines  
Multi-information display  
(During travel at (During travel at  
about 40 km/h about 80 km/h  
Instrument cluster (Type A)  
Instrument cluster (Type B)  
(25 mph)  
(50 mph)  
About 10 m (33 About 20 m (66  
ft) ft)  
About 10 m (32 About 20 m (65  
ft) or less ft) or less  
*2  
Illuminated in amber  
*2  
Illuminated in amber  
*
*
1 The distance between vehicles differs depending on vehicle speed.  
2 Indication when the distance setting for notifying the driver that the vehicle approaches  
a vehicle ahead is Near.  
4-139  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)*  
The DAA is a system which detects driver fatigue and decreased attentiveness, and  
encourages the driver to take a rest.  
When the vehicle is driven inside traffic lane lines at about 65 to 140 km/h (40 to 87 mph),  
the DAA estimates the amount of accumulated fatigue and decreased attentiveness of the  
driver based on the information from the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and other vehicle  
information, and encourages the driver to take a rest using an indication on the  
multi-information display and a warning sound.  
Use the DAA on expressways or highways.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-259.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on DAA and always drive carefully:  
The DAA detects driver fatigue and decreased attentiveness and encourages the driver to take  
a rest, however, it is not designed to prevent the vehicle from straying. If you rely too much on  
the DAA it could lead to an accident. Drive carefully and operate the steering wheel  
appropriately.  
In addition, the system may not be able to detect driver fatigue and decreased attentiveness  
correctly depending on the traffic and driving conditions. The driver must take sufficient rest  
in consideration of safer driving.  
NOTE  
The DAA operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
*Some models.  
4-140  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The vehicle speed is about 65 to 140 km/h (40 to 87 mph).  
The system detects white (yellow) lane lines.  
The system has completed learning of the driver’s driving data.  
The DAA does not operate under the following conditions.  
The vehicle speed is less than about 65 km/h (40 mph).  
The vehicle speed exceeds about 140 km/h (87 mph)  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn.  
The vehicle is changing lanes.  
The system cannot detect white (yellow) lane lines.  
The DAA may not operate normally under the following conditions.  
White (yellow) lane lines are less visible because of dirt or fading/patchiness.  
The vehicle is jolted or swayed continuously by strong winds or rough roads.  
The vehicle is driven aggressively.  
When making frequent lane changes.  
The DAA detects driver fatigue and decreased attentiveness based on the driving data  
when the vehicle is driven at about 65 to 140 km/h (40 to 87 mph) for about 20 minutes.  
The driving data will be reset under the following conditions.  
The vehicle is stopped for 15 minutes or longer.  
The vehicle is driven at less than about 65 km/h (40 mph) for about 30 minutes.  
The ignition is switched off.  
After the DAA has displayed the first message encouraging rest, it does not display the  
next one until 45 minutes have passed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Display (White)  
▼
When the system detects driver fatigue or  
decreased attentiveness, it activates the  
warning sound and displays an alert in the  
multi-information display.  
Canceling Driver Attention Alert  
(DAA)  
▼
The DAA can be set to not activate.  
4-141  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*  
The RCTA system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the rear of the  
vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is reversing by alerting the driver to the presence of  
vehicles approaching the rear of the vehicle.  
The RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the rear left and right sides of the  
vehicle, and the rear of the vehicle while the vehicle is being reversed out of a parking  
space, and notifies the driver of possible danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
warning indicator lights and the warning buzzer.  
Your vehicle  
Detection areas  
RCTA operation  
1. The RCTA system operates when the selector lever is shifted to the reverse (R) position.  
2. If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle, the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights flashes and the warning beep is activated  
simultaneously.  
(With rear view monitor)  
The RCTA warning indication in the rearview monitor also synchronizes with the Blind  
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light on the door mirrors.  
(With 360° view monitor)  
*Some models.  
4-142  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The RCTA warning indication in the 360° view monitor also synchronizes with the  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light on the door mirrors.  
Without 360°  
view monitor  
With 360° view monitor  
Mazda Connect (Type A) Mazda Connect (Type B)  
WARNING  
Always check the surrounding area visually before actually putting the vehicle in reverse:  
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at the rear when putting the  
vehicle in reverse. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights may not flash or it might be delayed even though  
a vehicle is behind your vehicle. Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the  
rear.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and  
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator  
light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible.  
Some problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning  
indicator lights has occurred.  
A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has  
occurred.  
There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor  
(rear).  
4-143  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods.  
The temperature near the radar sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long  
periods on slopes during the summer.  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it  
may be difficult to detect them.  
The vehicle speed when reversing is about 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.  
The radar sensor (rear) detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or parked vehicle.  
(Reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor detection area is no longer  
obstructed.)  
Your vehicle  
A vehicle is approaching directly from the rear of your vehicle.  
Your vehicle  
The vehicle is parked at an angle.  
Your vehicle  
Directly after the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system becomes operable using the  
personalization feature.  
Radio wave interference from a radar sensor equipped on a nearby parked vehicle.  
In the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the Blind  
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors.  
Snow or ice adheres to the door mirrors.  
The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.  
4-144  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Turn off the RCTA system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle  
carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted by the  
radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.  
4-145  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function  
(MRCC with Stop & Go function)*  
*1  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function system is designed to maintain headway control  
with a vehicle ahead according to your vehicle's speed using a radar sensor (front) to detect  
the distance to the vehicle ahead and a preset vehicle speed without you having to use the  
accelerator or brake pedals.  
*
1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead  
detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.  
Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead such as if the vehicle  
ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the display are  
activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a sufficient distance between the vehicles.  
If the vehicle ahead stops while you are following behind it, your vehicle will stop and be  
held stopped automatically (stop hold control), and headway control will resume when you  
resume driving the vehicle such as by pressing the RES switch.  
Also refer to the following before using the MRCC with Stop & Go function.  
AUTOHOLD (page 4-100)  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) (page 4-259)  
Radar sensor (front) (page 4-264)  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the MRCC with Stop & Go function:  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function system has detection limitations depending on the type of  
vehicle ahead and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the road conditions.  
Additionally, the system may be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoid hitting the vehicle  
ahead if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or another vehicle cuts into the driving  
lane, which could result in an accident.  
Always drive carefully and verify the surrounding conditions and depress the brake pedal or  
accelerator pedal while keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.  
Do not use the MRCC with Stop & Go function system in the following locations, using the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function system at the following locations may result in an unexpected  
accident:  
General roads other than highways (Driving under these conditions using the MRCC with  
Stop & Go function system is not possible.)  
Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient space  
between vehicles.  
*Some models.  
4-146  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and deceleration occur (Driving under  
these conditions using the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is not possible).  
When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of highways (If  
you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicle ahead will no longer be  
tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).  
Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (Tires could spin causing you to lose vehicle  
control, or the stop hold control may not operate.)  
Long, descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system automatically  
and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of brake power.)  
Slopes with a steep gradient (The vehicle ahead may not be detected correctly, your vehicle  
may slide while stopped by the stop hold control, and it may accelerate suddenly after it  
starts moving.)  
For safety purposes, switch the MRCC with Stop & Go function system off when it is not being  
used.  
Do not get out of the vehicle while the stop hold control is operating:  
Getting out of the vehicle while the stop hold control is operating is dangerous as the vehicle  
may move unexpectedly and result in an accident. Before getting out of the vehicle, switch the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function system off, shift the selector lever to the P position, and apply  
the parking brake.  
CAUTION  
If your vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system off to prevent a mis-operation.  
NOTE  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function system does not detect the following as physical  
objects.  
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction  
Pedestrians  
Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)  
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it  
correctly.  
During headway control travel, do not set the system for detection of two-wheeled  
vehicles such as motorcycles and bicycles.  
Do not use the MRCC with Stop & Go function system under conditions in which close  
proximity warnings are frequently activated.  
4-147  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
During headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in  
conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate  
for a lane change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the  
vehicle rapidly, accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake  
pedal depending on the conditions.  
While the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is in use, it does not cancel even if the  
selector lever is operated and any intended engine braking does not occur. If deceleration  
is required, lower the set speed or depress the brake pedal.  
The sound of the automatic brakes operating may be heard, however, it does not indicate  
a problem.  
The brake lights turn on while the MRCC with Stop & Go function automatic braking is  
operating.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) Display Indication  
▼
The MRCC with Stop & Go function setting status and operation conditions are indicated  
on the multi-information display and the active driving display.  
4-148  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Instrument cluster (Type A)  
Active driving display  
Vehicle ahead display  
MRCC Distance  
between vehicle  
display  
MRCC Set  
vehicle speed  
Multi-information Display  
Vehicle ahead display  
MRCC  
Distance  
between  
vehicle  
display  
*1  
MRCC Set vehicle speed  
*1: If the indication on the active driving display has been  
turned off using the personalization features, the indication  
is displayed on the multi-information display.  
4-149  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Instrument cluster (Type B)  
Active driving display  
Vehicle ahead display  
MRCC Distance  
between vehicle  
display  
MRCC Set  
vehicle speed  
Multi-information display  
Vehicle ahead display  
MRCC Distance  
between vehicle  
display  
MRCC Set vehicle speed  
Vehicle ahead display  
*1  
*1: If the indication on the active driving display has been  
turned off using the personalization features, the indication  
is displayed on the multi-information display.  
If there is a problem with the MRCC with Stop & Go function system, a message is  
displayed on the multi-information display. Check the center display to verify the problem  
and then have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to Message Indicated on Display on page 7-39.  
Close Proximity Warning  
▼
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the vehicle ahead because the vehicle ahead applies the  
brakes suddenly while you are traveling in headway control, the warning sound activates  
and the brake warning is indicated in the display. Always verify the safety of the  
surrounding area and depress the brake pedal while keeping a safer distance from the  
vehicle ahead. Additionally, keep a safer distance from the vehicles behind you.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the warnings and brakes may not operate even if your vehicle starts  
closing in on the vehicle ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Directly after the MRCC with Stop & Go function system has been set.  
Directly after the accelerator pedal is released.  
4-150  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane.  
Setting the System  
▼
The MRCC with Stop & Go function system operates when all of the following conditions  
are met.  
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph)  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function is turned on.  
The brake pedal is not depressed.  
The parking brake is released (Electric Parking Brake (EPB) indicator light is turned off).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
All the doors are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is canceled when the  
vehicle is traveling at 30 km/h (20 mph) or less and “Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
disabled under 30 km/h (20 mph)” is displayed in the multi-information display.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects (There is problem  
with the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or windshield is dirty).  
There is a problem with the stop hold control function.  
There is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).  
It may not be possible to set the MRCC with Stop & Go function system directly after  
starting the engine, while the DSC operation is being checked.  
4-151  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Turning on the system  
Type A  
switch  
switch  
SET+ switch  
RES switch  
SET- switch  
MODE switch  
CANCEL switch  
OFF switch  
Type B  
switch  
SET+ switch  
RES switch  
SET- switch  
CANCEL switch  
switch  
MRCC switch  
Steering wheel (Type A)  
When the MODE switch is pressed once, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system turns  
on, and the MRCC with Stop & Go function main indication (white) turns on and the  
vehicle speed and the distance between the vehicles while in headway control can be set.  
Steering wheel (Type B)  
When the MRCC switch is pressed once, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system turns  
on, and the MRCC with Stop & Go function main indication (white) turns on and the  
vehicle speed and the distance between the vehicles while in headway control can be set.  
In addition, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system display indication is displayed on  
the multi-information display and the active driving display at the same time.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched off while the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is  
operating, the system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next time.  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function can switch to the cruise control function.  
Refer to Cruise Control Function on page 4-158.  
4-152  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to set the speed  
1. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal.  
2. Headway control begins when the SET or SET switch is pressed.  
The set speed and the inter-vehicle distance display filled with white lines is displayed.  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function main indication (white) switches to the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function set indication (green) at the same time.  
Indication on multi-information display  
Type A Type B  
Indication on active driving  
display  
Travel status  
During travel  
at constant  
speed  
During travel  
under head‐  
way control  
NOTE  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the vehicle-ahead  
indication is displayed and headway control is performed. Additionally, when a vehicle  
ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead indication turns off and the system  
switches back to travel at constant speed.  
The lowest possible speed which can be set on the MRCC with Stop & Go function system  
is 30 km/h (19 mph).  
4-153  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Headway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than your vehicle's  
set speed. Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal.  
How to set the distance-between-vehicles during headway control  
Steering wheel (Type A)  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the switch. The  
distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing the switch. The  
distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and extremely short  
distance.  
Steering wheel (Type B)  
The distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and extremely  
short distance.  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the switch. The  
distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing the switch.  
Distance-between-vehi‐  
cles guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)  
vehicle speed)  
Indication on multi-information display  
Indication on active driv‐  
*1  
ing display  
Type A Type B  
Long (about 50 m (164  
ft))  
Medium (about 40 m  
(131 ft))  
Short (about 30 m (98  
ft))  
4-154  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Distance-between-vehi‐  
cles guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)  
vehicle speed)  
Indication on multi-information display  
Type A Type B  
Indication on active driv‐  
*1  
ing display  
Extremely short (about  
25 m (82 ft))  
*
1
Displays a pop-up image in the active driving display only when the driver operates the switch.  
NOTE  
The distance-between-vehicles differs depending on the vehicle speed, and the slower the  
vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again, the  
system automatically sets the distance-between-vehicles to the previous setting.  
How to change the set vehicle speed  
speed after you release your foot from the  
accelerator pedal.  
To accelerate/decelerate using the SET  
switch  
CAUTION  
When you press the SET switch, the  
vehicle accelerates and when you press the  
SET switch, it decelerates.  
The warnings and brake control do not  
operate while the accelerator pedal is  
depressed.  
Short press  
Long press  
1 km/h (1 mph)  
10 km/h (5 mph)  
NOTE  
The setting speed can be changed by  
operating the SET switch or SET  
switch during stop hold control.  
NOTE  
For example, the set vehicle speed is  
changed by pressing the SET switch four  
times as follows:  
When accelerating using the SET  
switch while in headway control, the set  
vehicle speed can be adjusted but  
acceleration is not possible. If there is  
no longer a vehicle ahead, acceleration  
continues until reaching the set vehicle  
speed. For the set vehicle speed, check  
the set vehicle speed indication in the  
display.  
The vehicle speed accelerates or  
decelerates by 4 km/h (4 mph).  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press  
and release the SET switch or SET  
switch at the desired speed. If the switch is  
not operated, the system returns to the set  
4-155  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When depressing the accelerator pedal,  
The radar sensor (front) cannot detect  
target objects (during rain, fog, snow or  
other inclement weather conditions, or  
when the radiator grille is dirty).  
the inter-vehicle distance indication in  
the display changes to the white-line  
indication.  
Resuming control  
Canceling the system  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system is canceled, you can resume  
control at the previously set speed by  
pressing the RES switch and after all of  
the operation conditions have been met.  
When the following operations are  
performed, the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system is canceled, and the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function set  
indication (green) switches to the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function main indication  
(white) at the same time.  
NOTE  
If the set speed is not indicated in the  
display, the control does not resume even  
if the RES switch is pressed.  
The CANCEL switch is pressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The parking brake is applied.  
Turning off the system  
The selector lever is in the P (Park), N  
Press the CANCEL switch 2 times while  
the MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system is operating to switch off the  
system.  
(Neutral), or R (Reverse) position.  
Under the following conditions, the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function cancel  
indication is displayed in the  
multi-information display and a single  
beep sound is heard.  
The DSC has operated.  
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has  
operated.  
The Smart City Brake Support  
[Forward] (SCBS F) or Advanced Smart  
City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)  
has operated.  
When traveling on a downslope for a  
long period of time.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The engine has stalled.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The parking brake is automatically  
applied during stop hold control.  
4-156  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Stop Hold Control  
▼
While in headway control using the MRCC with Stop & Go function system, your vehicle  
will stop when a vehicle ahead stops. When the vehicle is stopped and the stop hold control  
operates, the MRCC with Stop & Go function indicator light turns on.  
NOTE  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is canceled during stop hold control, the  
vehicle is held in its stopped position. The stop hold control can be canceled by  
performing one the following actions.  
Press the accelerator pedal and resume driving the vehicle.  
While forcefully depressing the brake, switch the MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system off.  
The parking brake is automatically applied and the vehicle is held in its stopped position  
when 10 minutes have elapsed since the stop hold control operated. At this time, the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function system is canceled.  
The brake lights turn on during stop hold control.  
To resume driving  
After the vehicle ahead starts moving while your vehicle is stopped under stop hold control,  
press the RES switch or depress the accelerator pedal to cancel the stop hold control and  
resume driving.  
NOTE  
When you resume driving by pressing the RES switch, your vehicle does not start moving  
until the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead lengthens to the specified  
distance or farther.  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go function is temporarily canceled during stop hold control,  
you cannot resume driving by pressing the RES switch when there are no vehicles in front  
of your vehicle. Depress the accelerator pedal and resume driving the vehicle.  
If the vehicle ahead starts moving within 3 seconds after your vehicle is stopped by the  
stop hold control, headway control will resume even if you do not resume driving your  
vehicle, such as by depressing the accelerator pedal.  
4-157  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Resume driving information  
If you do not resume driving within a few seconds after the vehicle ahead starts moving, the  
multi-information display vehicle-ahead indication flashes to urge the driver to resume  
driving.  
The warnings and brake control will not  
operate after the headway control function  
is canceled and the system is switched to  
only the cruise control function. Depress  
the brake pedal to decelerate according to  
the surrounding conditions while keeping a  
safer distance from the vehicle ahead and  
always driving carefully.  
Cruise Control Function  
▼
While this function is operating, the  
headway control operation is canceled and  
only the cruise control function operates.  
The vehicle speed can be set more than  
about 25 km/h (16 mph).  
Use the cruise control function on  
expressways and other highways which do  
not require a lot of repeated acceleration  
and deceleration.  
Switching to cruise control function  
Steering wheel (Type A)  
When the MODE switch is pressed until  
the system switches to the cruise main  
indication (white) while the MRCC with  
Stop & Go function system is turned on,  
the system switches to the cruise control  
function.  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control function in  
the following locations:  
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident.  
Steering wheel (Type B)  
Use Mazda Connect to switch to the cruise  
control function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Roads with sharp curves and where  
vehicle traffic is heavy and there is  
insufficient space between vehicles.  
(Driving under these conditions using the  
cruise control function is not possible)  
Steep down slopes (Set speed may be  
exceeded because sufficient engine  
braking cannot be applied)  
When the system switches to the cruise  
control function, the indicator and  
multi-information display notify the driver  
as follows:  
Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound  
roads (Tires could spin causing you to  
lose vehicle control)  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function set  
indication (green) or the MRCC with  
Stop & Go function main indication  
(white) is turned off, and the cruise main  
indication (white) is turned on.  
Always drive carefully:  
A message is displayed in the  
multi-information display.  
4-158  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
WARNING  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the  
SET or SET switch at the desired  
speed.  
If the switch is not operated, the system  
returns to the set speed after you release  
your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
Always turn off the cruise control function  
when it is not in use:  
Leaving the cruise control function turned  
on when it is not in use is dangerous as it  
could operate unexpectedly, resulting in an  
accident.  
How to Decrease the Set Speed  
How to set the speed  
Press the SET switch continuously and  
release the switch at the desired speed.  
The set speed can be adjusted  
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)  
increments) by pressing the switch and  
releasing it immediately. For example, if  
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set  
vehicle speed decreases by about 4 km/h  
(4 mph).  
Adjust the system to the desired vehicle  
speed using the accelerator pedal.  
When the SET or SET switch is  
pressed, the cruise set indication (green) is  
turned on and headway control begins.  
NOTE  
The system may not be able to maintain  
the set speed constantly depending on  
driving conditions such as steep up or  
down slopes.  
Canceling the function  
When the cruise control function is  
canceled and the RES switch is pressed  
while the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16  
mph) or faster, the speed returns to the  
original set speed.  
The speed will continue increasing while  
the SET switch is pressed and held.  
The speed will continue decreasing  
while the SET switch is pressed and  
held.  
Canceling using CANCEL switch  
How to increase the set speed  
When the CANCEL switch is pressed  
once, the cruise control function is  
cancelled.  
The set speed can be increased using the  
following operations:  
To increase speed using the SET  
switch  
Automatically cancel  
The cruise control function is canceled  
automatically in the following cases.  
Press and hold the SET switch and  
release the switch at the desired speed.  
The set speed can be adjusted  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)  
The parking brake is applied.  
increments) by pressing the switch and  
releasing it immediately. For example, if  
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set speed  
increases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).  
The selector lever is shifted to P or N  
position.  
4-159  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If the vehicle speed decreases by about  
15 km/h (9.4 mph) or more than the set  
speed, the cruise control function may  
be canceled.  
When the vehicle speed is less than 21  
km/h (13 mph), the cruise control  
function is canceled. In this case, the  
vehicle speed will not return to the  
original set speed even if the vehicle is  
accelerated to 25 km/h (16 mph) or  
higher and the RES switch is pressed.  
Reset the cruise control function.  
4-160  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)*  
The TJA is a system which consists of a headway control function and a steering assist  
function for reducing driver fatigue during traffic jams when driving on expressways or  
highways.  
This system performs headway control to maintain a constant distance between your vehicle  
and a vehicle ahead at a preset vehicle speed without you having to use the accelerator or  
brake pedal. Even further, with the steering assist function, when vehicle lane lines are  
detected, the function assists the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane lines. If lane  
lines are not detected, the function provides the driver driving assistance in keeping the  
vehicle along the motion path with the vehicle ahead.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on TJA:  
The TJA is not an automated driving system. In addition, the functions have limitations. Do  
not rely completely on the system and always stay on course using the steering wheel.  
Set a vehicle speed within the speed limit according to the road conditions and the weather  
conditions.  
The TJA may not be able to detect a vehicle ahead depending on the type of vehicle ahead  
and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the road conditions. Additionally, the  
system might be unable to decelerate sufficiently if a vehicle ahead applies the brakes  
suddenly, another vehicle cuts into the driving lane, or the difference in vehicle speed  
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is larger, which could result in an accident.  
Check the surrounding conditions and always drive carefully while keeping a safe distance  
from vehicles ahead and on-coming vehicles.  
For the purposes of safety, switch the TJA off when it is not being used.  
Leaving the TJA turned on when it is not in use is dangerous as it could operate unexpectedly,  
resulting in an accident.  
Do not use the TJA under the following conditions. Otherwise, it may result in an accident.  
General roads other than expressways or highways (Driving under these conditions using  
the TJA is not possible.)  
Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy with insufficient space between  
vehicles, or roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and deceleration occur  
(Driving under these conditions using the TJA is not possible).  
*Some models.  
4-161  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of expressways (If  
you exit an expressway while headway control is in use, the vehicle ahead will no longer be  
tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).  
Slippery roads such as icy or snow-covered roads and unpaved roads (Tires could spin  
causing you to lose vehicle control, or the stop hold control may not operate.)  
Long, descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system automatically  
and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of brake power.)  
Two-wheeled vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles are ahead.  
Slopes with a steep gradient (The vehicle ahead may not be detected correctly, your vehicle  
may slip while stopped by the stop hold control, or it may accelerate suddenly after it starts  
moving.)  
Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).  
Tires of a different specified size are used, such as a temporary spare tire.  
Tires with insufficient tread are used.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.  
The vehicle is being used to tow a camper or boat trailer.  
Tire chains are used.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with lane lines other than white (yellow) lines, such as an  
expressway.  
Do not get out of the vehicle while the stop hold control is operating.  
Getting out of the vehicle while the stop hold control is operating is dangerous as the vehicle  
may move unexpectedly and result in an accident. Before getting out of the vehicle, switch the  
TJA off, apply the parking brake, and then shift the selector lever to the P position.  
CAUTION  
Heed the following cautions so that the TJA can operate normally.  
Turn the system off when the vehicle is running on a chassis roller.  
Do not modify the vehicle's suspensions.  
Always use wheels of the specified size for the front and rear wheels. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
NOTE  
The headway control does not detect the following as physical objects.  
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction  
4-162  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Pedestrians  
Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)  
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it  
correctly.  
If there is a structure on the road or an object (such as a monorail) at a low height off the  
ground in front of the vehicle, the system may operate. Therefore, do not use the TJA.  
Do not use the TJA under conditions in which close proximity warnings are frequently  
activated.  
If it is necessary to accelerate for a lane change or the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly  
causing you to close in on the vehicle rapidly, accelerate using the accelerator pedal or  
decelerate using the brake pedal depending on the conditions.  
While the TJA is in use, any intended engine braking does not occur even if you shift the  
selector lever. If deceleration is required, lower the vehicle speed setting or depress the  
brake pedal.  
While braking by the TJA control is operating, you might hear an operation sound,  
however, this does not indicate a problem.  
The brake lights turn on while braking by the TJA control is operating, however, they may  
not turn on while the vehicle is on a down slope at the set vehicle speed or traveling at a  
constant speed and following a vehicle ahead.  
Under the following conditions, the TJA may not be able to detect white (yellow) lines or  
vehicles ahead correctly and the TJA may not operate normally.  
The forward sensing camera (FSC) cannot recognize the area in front of the vehicle due  
to soiling or fog.  
The white (yellow) lane lines are less visible because of dirt or paint flaking.  
White (yellow) lane lines or vehicles ahead are less visible because of bad weather  
(rain, fog, or snow).  
The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane resulting from  
construction where there might be multiple white (yellow) lane lines, or they are  
interrupted.  
The camera picks up an obscure line, such as a temporary line being used for  
construction, or because of shade, unmelted snow, or grooves filled with water.  
The road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat causing the  
vehicle to tilt.  
A vehicle in front of your vehicle is running near a white (yellow) lane line making it  
less visible.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
The vehicle is driven through an intersection, a junction, or a fork in the road.  
While white (yellow) lane lines cannot be detected due to road or weather conditions.  
The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a  
tunnel.  
4-163  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is  
deviated at night.  
Back-light is reflected off the road surface or the road surface is wet and shiny after  
rain.  
The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white (yellow) lane line is cast on the road.  
The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.  
The road is excessively uneven.  
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.  
There are various road markings or division lines (lane markings) of various shapes  
near an intersection.  
The area in front of the forward sensing camera (FSC) is soiled or an object that  
obstructs the field of view is installed.  
Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from  
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.  
The surroundings are dark such as during the early evening or early morning.  
A vehicle ahead with a certain taillight shape.  
A vehicle ahead veers off course from your vehicle's line of travel.  
A vehicle ahead is driving erratically.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with tight curves.  
Headway control function  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the vehicle-ahead  
indication is displayed and headway control is performed.  
Steering assist function  
When lane lines are detected, the function assists the driver in keeping the vehicle within the  
lane lines. If lane lines are not detected, the function provides the driver driving assistance  
in keeping the vehicle along the motion path with the vehicle ahead.  
4-164  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Steering assist limit warning  
If the steering assist function cannot keep the vehicle within the lane lines while the steering  
assist function is operating, a warning sound is activated and a warning is displayed on the  
multi-information display to urge the driver to operate the steering wheel.  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
*1  
*1  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
4-165  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) Display Indication  
▼
The TJA setting status and operation conditions are indicated on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Active driving display  
Vehicle ahead display  
TJA distance  
between vehicle  
display  
TJA set  
vehicle  
speed  
Multi-information display  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Vehicle ahead display  
Vehicle ahead display  
TJA distance  
between vehicle  
display  
TJA  
TJA set  
vehicle  
speed  
distance  
between  
vehicle  
display  
Vehicle  
ahead  
*1  
*1  
display  
TJA set vehicle speed  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
Steering assist function display  
When the steering assist function operates, the steering assist operation display on the  
display changes from white to green.  
4-166  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Multi-information display  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
*1  
*1  
Steering assist operation display  
Steering assist operation display  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
Active driving display  
Steering assist operation display  
NOTE  
You can view the multi-information display to check whether the steering assist is  
performing controls in conjunction with the traffic lane lines or a vehicle ahead.  
Inactive  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
*1  
*1  
Steering assist operation  
display (white)  
Steering assist operation  
display (white)  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
4-167  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Active (vehicle ahead)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
*1  
*1  
Steering assist operation  
display (green)  
Steering assist operation  
display (green)  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
Active (lane line)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
*1  
*1  
Steering assist operation  
display (green)  
Steering assist operation  
display (green)  
*1: Displayed on the basic display.  
If there is a problem with the TJA, a message is displayed on the display. Check the details  
of the problem and then have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Close Proximity Warning  
▼
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the vehicle ahead because the vehicle ahead applies the  
brakes suddenly while you are traveling in headway control, the warning sound activates  
and the brake warning is indicated in the display. Always verify the safety of the  
4-168  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
surrounding area and depress the brake pedal while keeping a safer distance from the  
vehicle ahead. Additionally, keep a safe distance from the vehicles behind you.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the warnings and brakes may not operate even if your vehicle starts  
closing in on the vehicle ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Directly after the TJA has been set.  
Directly after the accelerator pedal is released.  
Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane.  
Setting the System  
▼
Operation conditions  
Headway control function  
The TJA operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph)  
The headway control function of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go  
function (MRCC with Stop & Go function) is set to operable (if it was set to inoperable,  
set it to operable using the personalization function).  
The selector lever is in the D or M position (manual mode).  
The TJA is operating.  
The brake pedal is not depressed.  
The parking brake is released (Electric Parking Brake (EPB) indicator light is turned off).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
All the doors are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the TJA cannot be used when the vehicle speed is 30 km/h  
(19 mph) or slower.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects (There is problem  
with the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or windshield is dirty).  
There is a problem with the stop hold control function.  
There is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).  
4-169  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The TJA may not launch directly after the engine starts.  
Steering assist function  
The steering assist function operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
Your vehicle is moving and less than about 56 km/h (35 mph).  
White (yellow) lane lines on both sides are detected and you are driving near the center of  
the lane, or your vehicle detects a vehicle ahead.  
The steering wheel is not turned sharply.  
The turn signal lever is not operated.  
The headway control function is operating.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist is not operating.  
When Off-road mode is not selected using Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive).  
NOTE  
The steering assist function operates so that the vehicle remains near the center of the  
driving lane, however, depending on conditions such as the road curvature, road slope  
and undulations, and vehicle speed, the function might not be able to keep the vehicle  
near the center of the driving lane.  
Setting method  
switch  
SET+ switch  
RES switch  
SET- switch  
CANCEL switch  
switch  
TJA switch  
MRCC switch  
1. Press the TJA switch.  
The TJA standby indication (white) turns on. In addition, the TJA display indication is  
displayed on the multi-information display at the same time.  
(White)  
4-170  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
2. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal and press the  
SET+ switch or SET- switch to start headway control.  
The set speed is indicated on the display. At the same time, the TJA standby indication  
(white) changes to the TJA set indication (green).  
(Green)  
3. The headway control is operable when all of the conditions for it to operate are met, or  
the steering assist function is operable when all of the conditions for it to operate are  
met.  
NOTE  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the vehicle-ahead  
indication is displayed and headway control is performed. Additionally, when a vehicle  
ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead indication turns off and the system  
switches back to travel at constant speed.  
The lowest possible speed which can be set on the TJA is 30 km/h (19 mph).  
Headway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than your vehicle's  
set speed. Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal.  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the system status before it was turned off is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched OFF with the TJA operable, the TJA  
remains operational the next time the ignition is switched ON.  
When the TJA switch is pressed while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go  
function (MRCC with Stop & Go function) system is operating, the TJA operates. In  
addition, when the MRCC switch is pressed while the TJA is operating, the Mazda Radar  
Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function) system  
operates.  
Changing the set vehicle speed  
To accelerate/decelerate using the SET switch  
When you press the SET+ switch, the vehicle accelerates and when you press the SET-  
switch, it decelerates.  
Short press  
Long press  
1 km/h (1 mph)  
10 km/h (5 mph)  
4-171  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
For example, the set vehicle speed is changed by pressing the SET switch four times as  
follows:  
The vehicle speed accelerates or decelerates by 4 km/h (4 mph).  
To increase speed using accelerator pedal  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press and release the SET+ switch or SET- switch at the  
desired speed. If the switch is not operated, the system returns to the set speed after you  
release your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
CAUTION  
The warnings and brake control do not operate while the accelerator pedal is depressed.  
NOTE  
When accelerating using the SET+ switch while in headway control, the set vehicle speed  
can be adjusted but acceleration is not possible. If there is no longer a vehicle ahead,  
acceleration continues until reaching the set vehicle speed. For the set vehicle speed,  
check the set vehicle speed indication in the display.  
When depressing the accelerator pedal, the inter-vehicle distance indication in the display  
changes to the white-line indication.  
The setting speed can be changed by operating the SET+ switch or SET- switch during  
stop hold control.  
Changing the distance between vehicles during headway control  
The distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and extremely  
short distance.  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the switch. The  
distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing the switch.  
Distance-between-vehi‐  
cles guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)  
vehicle speed)  
Indication on multi-information display  
Indication on active driv‐  
*1  
ing display  
Type A Type B  
Long (about 50 m (164  
ft))  
4-172  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Distance-between-vehi‐  
cles guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)  
vehicle speed)  
Indication on multi-information display  
Type A Type B  
Indication on active driv‐  
*1  
ing display  
Medium (about 40 m  
(131 ft))  
Short (about 30 m (98  
ft))  
Extremely short (about  
25 m (82 ft))  
*
1
Displays a pop-up image in the active driving display only when the driver operates the switch.  
NOTE  
The distance-between-vehicles differs depending on the vehicle speed, and the slower the  
vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again, the  
system automatically sets the distance-between-vehicles to the previous setting.  
The function is temporarily canceled  
Headway control function  
When the following operations are performed, the headway control function is temporarily  
canceled and the TJA set indication (green) changes to the TJA standby indication (white) at  
the same time.  
The CANCEL switch is pressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
4-173  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The parking brake is applied.  
The selector lever is in the P, N, or R position.  
Under the following conditions, the TJA cancel indication is displayed in the  
multi-information display and a single beep sound is heard.  
The DSC has operated.  
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has operated.  
The Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F) or Advanced Smart City Brake  
Support (Advanced SCBS) has operated.  
When traveling on a downslope for a long period of time.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The engine has stalled.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The radar sensor (front) cannot detect target objects (during rain, fog, snow or other  
inclement weather conditions, or when the radiator grille is dirty).  
The parking brake is automatically applied during stop hold control.  
Steering assist function  
If any of the following conditions occurs, the steering assist function is temporarily  
canceled.  
The headway control function is canceled.  
White (yellow) lane lines cannot be detected or a vehicle ahead cannot be recognized.  
Your vehicle speed is more than about 64 km/h (40 mph).  
The accelerator pedal is operated.  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist has operated.  
When Off-road mode is selected using Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive).  
The vehicle is being driven on a sharp curve.  
The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.  
The vehicle crosses a lane line.  
The driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel.  
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The temperature in the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is too high or too low.  
The windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is foggy.  
The windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is blocked by an obstruction,  
causing poor forward visibility.  
4-174  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If you take your hands off the steering wheel, a warning is indicated on the  
multi-information display and the active driving display. Then, if you continue to leave  
your hands off the steering wheel, a warning is indicated on the multi-information display  
and the active driving display and a warning sound is activated.  
Multi-information Display  
Active Driving Display  
If the steering wheel is held lightly, or depending on the road conditions, the system  
determines that you have released the steering wheel (not holding the steering wheel)  
even if you are holding it, and an alert is indicated on the multi-information display and  
the active driving display.  
To resume operation  
If the TJA is temporarily canceled, it will resume operation at the previously set speed by  
pressing the RES switch after all of the operation conditions have been met.  
NOTE  
If the set speed is not indicated on the display, the system does not operate even if the RES  
switch is pressed.  
After the operation, the steering assist operation may not operate for a period of 5  
seconds at the most until the lane lines are detected or a vehicle ahead is recognized.  
Turning off  
When the TJA switch is pressed while the TJA is operating, the TJA turns off.  
4-175  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Stop Hold Control  
▼
When you resume driving by pressing  
While in headway control using the TJA,  
your vehicle will stop when a vehicle  
ahead stops. When the vehicle is stopped  
and the stop hold control operates, the TJA  
indicator light turns on.  
the RES switch, your vehicle does not  
start moving until the distance between  
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead  
lengthens to the specified distance or  
farther.  
If the TJA is temporarily canceled  
during stop hold control, you cannot  
resume driving by pressing the RES  
switch when there are no vehicles in  
front of your vehicle. Depress the  
accelerator pedal and resume driving  
the vehicle.  
NOTE  
If the TJA system is canceled during  
stop hold control, the vehicle is held in  
its stopped position. The stop hold  
control can be canceled by performing  
one the following actions.  
If the vehicle ahead starts moving within  
3 seconds after your vehicle is stopped  
by the stop hold control, headway  
control will resume even if you do not  
resume driving your vehicle, such as by  
depressing the accelerator pedal.  
Press the accelerator pedal and  
resume driving the vehicle.  
While forcefully depressing the brake,  
switch the TJA system off.  
The parking brake is automatically  
Resume driving information  
applied and the vehicle is held in its  
stopped position when 10 minutes have  
elapsed since the stop hold control  
operated. At this time, the TJA system is  
canceled.  
If you do not resume driving within a few  
seconds after the vehicle ahead starts  
moving, the multi-information display  
vehicle-ahead indication flashes to urge  
the driver to resume driving.  
The brake lights turn on during stop  
hold control.  
To resume driving  
After the vehicle ahead starts moving  
while your vehicle is stopped under stop  
hold control, press the RES switch or  
depress the accelerator pedal to cancel the  
stop hold control and start driving.  
4-176  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure  
Warning System (LDWS)*  
The LAS & LDWS alerts the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane and it  
provides steering assistance to help the driver stay within the vehicle lanes.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects the white lines (yellow lines) of the vehicle  
lane in which the vehicle is traveling and if the system determines that the vehicle may  
deviate from its lane, it operates the electric power steering to assist the driver's steering  
operation. The system also alerts the driver by activating a lane departure warning sound,  
vibrating the steering wheel, and indicating an alert in the display. Use the system when you  
drive the vehicle on roads with white (yellow) lines such as expressways and highways.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-259.  
Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC)  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the LAS & LDWS:  
The LAS & LDWS is not an automatic driving system. In addition, the system is not designed  
to compensate for a driver's lack of caution, and over-reliance on the system could lead to  
an accident.  
The detection ability of the LAS & LDWS is limited. Always stay on course using the steering  
wheel and drive with care.  
Do not use the LAS & LDWS in the following cases:  
The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions, resulting  
in an accident.  
*Some models.  
4-177  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Driving on roads with tight curves.  
Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).  
Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads.  
Roads with heavy traffic and insufficient distance between vehicles.  
Roads with no white (yellow) lane lines.  
Narrow roads resulting from road construction or lane closures.  
The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane resulting from road  
construction where there may be multiple white (yellow) lane lines or they are interrupted.  
Vehicle is driven on roads other than expressways and highways.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.  
The vehicle is being used to tow a camper or boat trailer.  
Tires of a different specified size are used, such as an emergency spare tire.  
CAUTION  
Heed the following cautions so that the LAS & LDWS can operate normally.  
Do not modify the suspensions.  
Always use wheels of the specified type and size for the front and rear wheels. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
NOTE  
When the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the LAS & LDWS is  
automatically disabled. The LAS & LDWS becomes operational again when the turn  
signal lever is returned and the system detects white (yellow) lane lines while the vehicle  
is being driven normally within its vehicle lane.  
If the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the  
vehicle moves close to a white (yellow) line, the system determines that the driver is  
making a lane change and the LAS & LDWS operation is temporarily canceled. The LAS  
& LDWS becomes operational again when the system detects white (yellow) lane lines  
while the vehicle is being driven normally within its vehicle lane.  
If the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly within a short period of time, the LAS &  
LDWS may not operate.  
When white (yellow) lane lines are not detected, the LAS & LDWS does not operate.  
Under the following conditions, the LAS & LDWS may not be able to detect white (yellow)  
lane lines correctly and it may not operate normally.  
If an object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the  
camera.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the  
vehicle is tilted.  
4-178  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.  
Tires other than conventional tires are equipped.  
Vehicle is driven on an intersection or junction, or on a forked road.  
The white (yellow) lane lines are less visible because of dirt or fading/patchiness.  
A vehicle in front of your vehicle is running near a white (yellow) lane line making it  
less visible.  
A white (yellow) lane line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).  
The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane resulting from  
construction where there may be multiple white (yellow) lane lines or they are  
interrupted.  
A misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction, or  
because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves filled with water.  
The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a  
tunnel.  
The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is  
deviated.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
The windshield, camera is fogged (water droplets).  
Back-light is reflected off the road surface.  
The road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.  
The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white (yellow) lane line is cast on the road.  
The width of the driving lane is narrow or wide.  
Driving on roads with tight curves.  
The road is excessively uneven.  
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.  
There are 2 or more adjacent white (yellow) lane lines.  
There are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an  
intersection.  
System Operation  
▼
System operation  
When the ignition is switched ON, the system goes on standby.  
Drive the vehicle in the center of the vehicle lane while the system is on standby. When all  
of the following conditions are met, and the system becomes operational.  
The engine is running.  
The vehicle speed is about 64 km/h (40 mph) or faster.  
The system detects white (yellow) lane lines on both the right and left sides.  
The driver is operating the steering wheel.  
The driving lane is neither narrow nor wide.  
The steering assist function of the Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) is not operating.  
4-179  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When the system becomes operational, the LAS & LDWS indication (white) is displayed on  
the multi-information display and active driving display.  
Multi-information display (Basic display)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Multi-information display (i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
*
Active driving display  
The LAS & LDWS goes on stand-by status in the following cases:  
The system cannot detect white (yellow) lane lines.  
The vehicle speed is less than about 56 km/h (35 mph).  
The ABS/TCS is operating.  
The TCS is turned off.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist is turned on.  
*Some models.  
4-180  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When Off-road mode is selected using Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive).  
The vehicle is making a sharp curve.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.  
The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.  
The steering assist function of the TJA operated.  
NOTE  
The LAS & LDWS does not operate until the system detects white (yellow) lane lines on  
either the left or right.  
When the system detects a white (yellow) lane line on one side only, the system will not  
operate the steering wheel operation assist and the warning for the lane line on the side  
that is not being detected. The steering wheel operation assist and the warning is only for  
a lane deviation on the side that is being detected.  
When the system determines that the driver is driving the vehicle with his or her hands off  
the steering wheel while the steering wheel operation assist is operating, and if the  
condition continues several times within a certain period of time, the warning sound is  
activated. The higher the number of times the steering wheel operation assist operates,  
the longer the period of time the warning sound is activated.  
The timing at which the lane departure warning is activated and the steering wheel  
operation assist is performed varies.  
The following settings for the LAS & LDWS can be changed. Refer to the Settings section  
in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Steering operation assist operational/non-operational  
(Mazda Connect (Type A) only)  
Cancel sensitivity (likelihood of steering assist)  
Vehicle lane line display  
When the LAS & LDWS goes on standby, the vehicle lane lines are indicated on the  
multi-information display and the active driving display. When white (yellow) lines on both  
the left and right sides are detected and the system becomes operational, the vehicle lane  
lines indicated on the multi-information display and the active driving display change to  
white.  
4-181  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
(Stand-by status)  
Multi-information display (Basic display)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Multi-information display (i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
*
Active driving display  
*Some models.  
4-182  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
(Operational status)  
Multi-information display (Basic display)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Multi-information display (i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
*
Active driving display  
NOTE  
When only one side of the white (yellow) lines is detected, only the detected vehicle lane line  
indicated on the multi-information display and the active driving display changes to white.  
Auto cancel  
In the following cases, the LAS & LDWS is automatically canceled, the LAS & LDWS  
warning indication (amber) turns on, and an alert is displayed. When the LAS & LDWS  
become operational, the system turns back on automatically.  
*Some models.  
4-183  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The temperature inside the camera is high or low.  
The windshield around the camera is foggy.  
The windshield around the camera is blocked by an obstruction, causing poor forward  
visibility.  
Auto cancel of warning/steering assist  
When the following operations are performed, the LAS & LDWS operation is canceled  
automatically. The LAS & LDWS resumes automatically after the operation.  
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.  
The brake pedal is operated.  
The accelerator pedal is operated.  
(Mazda Connect (Type A) only)  
(To cancel the automatic sensitivity cancel function, deselect “Cancel sensitivity” in the  
personalization features setting.)  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The vehicle crosses a lane line.  
NOTE  
After the operation, the LAS & LDWS operation may not operate for a period of 5  
seconds at the most until the lane lines are detected.  
Under the following conditions, the LAS & LDWS cancels the warning/steering assist  
automatically.  
The TCS OFF switch is pressed to cancel the TCS.  
The Off-Road Traction Assist switch is pressed to turn on the Off-Road Traction Assist.  
When Off-road mode is selected using Mazda intelligent Drive Select (Mi-Drive).  
Steering wheel operation assist OFF (non-operational)  
The steering wheel operation assist for the LAS & LDWS can be turned off. However, when  
driving the vehicle while the TJA function is in use, the steering wheel operation assist turns  
on automatically.  
When the steering wheel operation assist has been turned off, only the lane departure  
warning is operational.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
System operation  
Drive the vehicle in the center of the driving lane while the LAS & LDWS OFF indicator  
light in the instrument cluster is turned off.  
The system becomes operational when all of the following conditions are met.  
The engine is running.  
4-184  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The vehicle speed is about 64 km/h (40 mph) or faster.  
The system detects white (yellow) lane lines on both the right and left sides or on either  
side.  
The vehicle is driven on a straight road or road with gentle curves.  
The steering assist function of the TJA is not operating.  
The LAS & LDWS goes on stand-by status in the following cases:  
The vehicle speed is less than about 56 km/h (35 mph).  
The system cannot detect white (yellow) lane lines.  
The vehicle is making a sharp curve.  
The vehicle is making a curve at an inappropriate speed.  
The steering assist function of the TJA operated.  
NOTE  
The LAS & LDWS remains on stand-by until it detects white (yellow) lines on both the left  
and right sides, or on either side.  
When the system detects a white (yellow) lane line on one side only, the system will not  
activate warnings for the lane line on the side that is not being detected.  
(Mazda Connect (Type A) only)  
The distance and warning sensitivity (likelihood of a warning) which the system uses to  
determine the possibility of a lane departure can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Vehicle lane line display  
When the LAS & LDWS becomes operational while on standby, the vehicle lane lines are  
displayed in the multi-information display. The system changes to operational status display  
when the system detects a white (yellow) line on either the left or right.  
(Stand-by status)  
4-185  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
(Operational status)  
NOTE  
When only one side of the white (yellow) lines is detected, only the detected vehicle lane line  
indicated on the multi-information display changes to white.  
Auto cancel  
In the following cases, the LAS & LDWS is automatically canceled, the LAS & LDWS  
warning indication (amber) turns on, and an alert is displayed. When the LAS & LDWS  
become operational, the system turns back on automatically.  
The temperature inside the camera is high or low.  
The windshield around the camera is foggy.  
The windshield around the camera is blocked by an obstruction, causing poor forward  
visibility.  
Auto cancel of warnings  
When the following operations are performed, the LAS & LDWS determines that the driver  
intends to make a lane change and the system operation is canceled automatically. The LAS  
& LDWS resumes automatically after the operation.  
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
(Mazda Connect (Type A) only)  
(To cancel the automatic sensitivity cancel function, deselect “Warning sensitivity” in the  
personalization features setting.)  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The vehicle crosses a lane line.  
The system notifies the driver that it  
provided steering wheel operation  
assistance on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Steering Wheel Operation Assist  
▼
When the system determines that the  
vehicle might be deviating from its lane,  
the steering wheel operation assist  
operates.  
4-186  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Multi-information display (Basic  
display)  
Instrument Cluster (Type A)  
Instrument Cluster (Type B)  
Multi-information display  
(i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
*
Active driving display  
NOTE  
When the driver operates the steering  
wheel while the steering wheel  
operation assist is operating, the  
steering wheel operation assistance is  
canceled.  
*Some models.  
4-187  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Lane Departure Warning  
▼
If the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, the lane departure  
warning is activated and the direction in which the system determines that the vehicle may  
deviate is indicated in the multi-information display and the active driving display.  
For vehicles equipped with the multi-information display, the direction which the system  
determined that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane is indicated in the  
multi-information display.  
For vehicles equipped with the active driving display, the color of the lane line in the  
direction which the system determined that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane  
changes from white to amber and the vehicle lane line flashes.  
Multi-information Display  
Active Driving Display  
NOTE  
If you have set the lane departure warning sound to the beep sound/rumble sound (Mazda  
Connect (Type A) only) setting, the warning sound may not be heard depending on the  
*1  
surrounding noise conditions.  
If you have set the lane departure warning system to the steering wheel vibrations setting,  
the vibration may not be felt depending on the road surface conditions.  
When the setting for the steering operation assist is changed to operational, the warnings  
can be set to activate/not activate. (If the setting for the steering operation assist is  
changed to non-operational, the warnings cannot be set to non-operational.)  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
The LAS & LDWS can be changed to the following settings regardless of whether the  
steering operation assist has been set to operational/non-operational. Always check the  
setting status when driving the vehicle and make setting changes if necessary.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Steering wheel vibration: Strong/weak  
Warning sound volume  
Types of warnings (steering wheel vibration/beep sound/rumble sound (Mazda Connect  
*1  
(Type A) only) )  
*
1 A rumble strip is a series of grooves in the road pavement surface positioned at specific  
intervals, and when the vehicle passes over it a vibration and rumble sound is produced  
which alerts the driver that the vehicle is departing from the lane.  
4-188  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The rumble sound is a reproduction of the sound which occurs when a vehicle passes  
over a rumble strip.  
Rumble  
Groove  
NOTE  
System Canceling  
▼
When driving the vehicle while the TJA  
function is in use, the LAS & LDWS  
turns on automatically.  
In the following cases, the LAS & LDWS  
is canceled automatically and the LAS  
& LDWS OFF indicator light turns on.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
When the LAS & LDWS is turned off,  
press the LAS & LDWS OFF switch.  
There is a malfunction in the power  
steering.  
There is a malfunction in the TCS.  
There is a malfunction in the Forward  
The LAS & LDWS OFF indicator light  
turns on.  
Sensing Camera (FSC).  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the  
system status before it was turned off is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition  
is switched OFF with the lane-keep  
system operable, the system will be  
operable when the ignition is switched  
ON the next time.  
When the LAS & LDWS is turned off, the  
vehicle lane line indication in the  
4-189  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
multi-information display and the active  
driving display turn off.  
4-190  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)*  
The Advanced SCBS alerts the driver of a possible collision using the display and a warning  
sound when the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects a vehicle ahead or pedestrian and  
determines that a collision with the object is unavoidable while the vehicle is driven at a  
vehicle speed of about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph) if the object is a vehicle ahead and about  
10 to 80 km/h (6.2 to 50 mph) if the object is a pedestrian. In addition, the system reduces  
damage in the event of a collision by operating the brake control (Advanced SCBS brake)  
when the system determines that a collision is unavoidable. In addition, when the driver  
depresses the brake pedal, the brakes are applied firmly and quickly to assist. (Brake Assist  
(Advanced SCBS brake assist))  
Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC)  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the Advanced SCBS system:  
The Advanced SCBS system is only designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision.  
Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal being  
mistakenly operated could result in an accident.  
The Advanced SCBS system operates in response to a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian. The  
system does not operate in response to obstructions such as a wall, 2-wheeled vehicles, or  
animals.  
*Some models.  
4-191  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
CAUTION  
In the following cases, turn the system off to prevent a mis-operation:  
The vehicle is being towed or when towing another vehicle.  
The vehicle is on a chassis roller.  
When driving on rough roads such as in areas of dense grass or off-road.  
Refer to Stopping the Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS) System Operation  
on page 4-193 on how to turn off the Advanced SCBS system.  
NOTE  
The Advanced SCBS system will operate under the following conditions.  
The engine is running.  
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) warning indication (amber) does not illuminate.  
(Object is vehicle ahead)  
The vehicle speed is between about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph).  
(Object is a pedestrian)  
The vehicle speed is between about 10 to 80 km/h (6.2 to 50 mph).  
The Advanced SCBS system is not turned off.  
Under the following conditions, the Advanced SCBS system may not operate normally:  
The Advanced SCBS system will not operate if the driver is deliberately performing  
driving operations (accelerator pedal and steering wheel).  
If there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead.  
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road surface such as wet roads or icy or snow-bound  
roads.  
The braking performance is adversely affected due to cold temperatures or wet brakes.  
The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is being operated.  
The selector lever is being operated.  
In the following cases, the Advanced SCBS may operate.  
Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve.  
Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.  
When passing through a toll gate.  
When passing through low gates, narrow gates, car washing machines, or tunnels.  
If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.  
2-wheeled vehicles, animals, or standing trees.  
4-192  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
During the SBS brake control, the brake pedal may move rearward or become stiff. The  
brakes are operating, but continue to depress the brake pedal.  
Collision Warning  
Stopping the Advanced Smart City  
Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)  
System Operation  
▼
▼
If there is the possibility of a collision with  
a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds  
continuously and a warning is indicated in  
the multi-information display and the  
active driving display.  
The Advanced SCBS system can be  
temporarily deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the Advanced SCBS system is  
turned off, the Smart City Brake Support  
(SCBS) OFF indicator light turns on.  
NOTE  
The operation distance and volume of the  
collision warning can be changed. Refer  
to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Automatic Brake Operation Display  
▼
The automatic brake operation display is  
indicated on the multi-information display  
after the Advanced SCBS is operated.  
When the engine is restarted, the system  
becomes operational.  
NOTE  
When the Advanced SCBS system is set to  
inoperable, the Smart City Brake Support  
[Reverse] (SCBS R) system and the Smart  
Brake Support (SBS) are also set to  
inoperable.  
NOTE  
The collision warning beep sounds  
intermittently while the Advanced SCBS  
brake or brake assist (Advanced SCBS  
brake assist) is operating.  
If the vehicle is stopped by the Advanced  
SCBS operation and the brake pedal is  
not depressed, the warning beep sounds  
1 time after about 2 seconds and the  
Advanced SCBS brake is automatically  
released.  
4-193  
   
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F)*  
The SCBS F system alerts the driver of a possible collision using an indication in the  
display and a warning sound when the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects a vehicle  
ahead and determines that a collision with a vehicle ahead is unavoidable while the vehicle  
is being driven at a vehicle speed of about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph). In addition, the  
system reduces damage in the event of a collision by operating the brake control (Smart City  
Brake Support (SCBS) brake) when the system determines that a collision is unavoidable  
while the vehicle is being driven at a vehicle speed of about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph). It  
may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your vehicle and the  
vehicle in front of you is less than about 20 km/h (12 mph). In addition, when the driver  
depresses the brake pedal while the system is in the operation range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2  
to 18 mph), the brakes are applied firmly and quickly to assist. (Brake Assist (Smart City  
Brake Support (SCBS) brake assist))  
Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC)  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the SCBS F system:  
The SCBS F system is only designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision. Over  
reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal being mistakenly  
operated could result in an accident.  
The SCBS F is a system which operates in response to a vehicle ahead. The system may not  
be able to detect or react to 2-wheeled vehicles or pedestrians.  
*Some models.  
4-194  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
CAUTION  
In the following cases, turn the system off to prevent a mis-operation:  
The vehicle is being towed or when towing another vehicle.  
The vehicle is on a chassis roller.  
When driving on rough roads such as in areas of dense grass or off-road.  
Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F) system Operation on page  
4-196 on how to turn off the SCBS F system.  
NOTE  
The SCBS F system will operate under the following conditions.  
The engine is running.  
The Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) system warning  
indication/warning light (amber) does not illuminate.  
(Rear-end collision warning)  
The vehicle speed is about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph).  
(Brake control (Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) brake))  
The vehicle speed is about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).  
The SCBS F system is not turned off.  
Under the following conditions, the SCBS F system may not operate normally:  
The SCBS F system will not operate if the driver is deliberately performing driving  
operations (accelerator pedal and steering wheel).  
If there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead.  
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road surface such as wet roads or icy or snow-bound  
roads.  
The braking performance is adversely affected due to cold temperatures or wet brakes.  
The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is being operated.  
The selector lever is being operated.  
In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines that there is a  
vehicle ahead and the SCBS F may operate.  
Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve.  
Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.  
Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.  
When passing through a toll gate.  
When passing through low gates, narrow gates, car washing machines, or tunnels.  
4-195  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.  
2-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.  
Vehicle is driven with some of the tires having significant wear.  
During the SBS brake control, the brake pedal may move rearward or become stiff. The  
brakes are operating, but continue to depress the brake pedal.  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)  
Indicator Light (Red)*  
Automatic Brake Operation  
Display*  
▼
▼
If the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is  
operating, the indicator light (red) flashes.  
The automatic brake operation display is  
indicated on the multi-information display  
after the SCBS F is operated.  
NOTE  
Collision Warning*  
▼
The collision warning beep sounds  
intermittently while the SCBS F brake or  
brake assist (SCBS F brake assist) is  
operating.  
If there is the possibility of a collision with  
a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds  
continuously and a warning is indicated in  
the multi-information display and the  
active driving display.  
If the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS F  
operation and the brake pedal is not  
depressed, the warning beep sounds 1  
time after about 2 seconds and the SCBS  
F brake is automatically released.  
NOTE  
The operation distance and volume of the  
collision warning can be changed. Refer  
to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
Stopping the Smart City Brake  
Support (SCBS) System Operation  
▼
The SCBS F system can be temporarily  
deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
*Some models.  
4-196  
   
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When the SCBS F system is turned off, the  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF  
indicator light turns on.  
When the engine is restarted, the system  
becomes operational.  
NOTE  
When the SCBS F system is set to  
inoperable, the Smart Brake Support  
(SBS) are also set to inoperable.  
4-197  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Smart City Brake Support [Reverse] (SCBS R)*  
The SCBS R is a system which is designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision by  
operating the brake control (SCBS brake) when the system’s ultrasonic sensors detect an  
obstruction at the rear of the vehicle while driving at a speed of about 2 to 8 km/h (2 to 4  
mph) and the system determines that a collision is unavoidable.  
Ultrasonic sensor (rear)  
Reverse  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the SCBS R system:  
The SCBS R system is only designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision. Over  
reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal being mistakenly  
operated could result in an accident.  
To assure the correct operation of the SCBS R, heed the following cautions.  
Do not apply a sticker to an ultrasonic sensor (rear) (including transparent stickers).  
Otherwise, the ultrasonic sensor (rear) may not be able to detect vehicles or obstructions  
which could result in an accident.  
Do not disassemble an ultrasonic sensor (rear).  
If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible around an ultrasonic  
sensor (rear), stop using the SCBS R system immediately and have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If the vehicle continues to be driven with cracks or  
scratch marks left around an ultrasonic sensor, the system may operate unnecessarily  
and cause an unexpected accident.  
Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support [Reverse] (SCBS R) System Operation on  
page 4-201.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for rear bumper replacement.  
Do not modify the suspension:  
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the SCBS R system may not operate correctly  
because it cannot detect obstructions correctly.  
*Some models.  
4-198  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not apply a strong force to an ultrasonic sensor (rear):  
When washing the vehicle, do not spray highly pressurized water against an ultrasonic sensor  
(rear), or rub it strongly. In addition, do not hit the rear bumper forcefully when loading and  
unloading cargo Otherwise, the sensors may not detect obstructions correctly which could  
cause the SCBS R system to not operate normally, or it could operate unnecessarily.  
CAUTION  
When driving off-road in areas where there is grass or foliage, it is recommended that the  
SCBS R system be turned off.  
Always use tires of the specified size and the same manufacturer, brand, and tread pattern  
on all 4 wheels. In addition, do not use tires with significantly different wear patterns on the  
same vehicle. Otherwise, the SCBS R system may not operate normally.  
If ice or snow is stuck on the ultrasonic sensors (rear) they may not be able to detect  
obstructions correctly depending on the conditions. In such cases, the system may not be  
able to perform controls correctly. Always drive carefully and pay attention to the rear of  
the vehicle.  
NOTE  
The vehicle posture changes depending on the accelerator pedal, brake pedal and  
steering wheel operations, which could make it difficult for the system to recognize an  
obstruction, or it could facilitate unnecessary detection. In such cases, the SCBS R may or  
may not operate.  
The SCBS R system will operate under the following conditions.  
The engine is running.  
The selector lever is in the R (reverse) position.  
“Reverse Smart City Brake Support Malfunction” is not displayed in the  
multi-information display.  
The vehicle speed is between about 2 to 8 km/h (2 to 4 mph).  
The SCBS R is not turned off.  
The DSC is not malfunctioning.  
The SCBS R operates using ultrasonic sensors (rear) which detect obstructions at the rear  
by emitting ultrasonic waves and then receiving the returning waves reflected off the  
obstructions.  
In the following cases, the ultrasonic sensors (rear) cannot detect obstructions and the  
SCBS R may not operate.  
The height of the obstruction is low such as low walls or trucks with low loading  
platforms.  
The height of the obstruction is high such as trucks with high loading platforms.  
4-199  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The obstruction is small.  
The obstruction is thin such as a signpost.  
The obstruction is positioned away from the center of the vehicle.  
The surface of the obstruction is not pointed vertically relative to the vehicle.  
The obstruction is soft such as a hanging curtain or snow stuck to a vehicle.  
The obstruction is shaped irregularly.  
The obstruction is extremely close.  
In the following cases, the ultrasonic sensors (rear) cannot detect obstructions correctly  
and the SCBS R may not operate.  
Something is stuck on the bumper near an ultrasonic sensor (rear).  
The steering wheel is turned sharply, or the brake or accelerator pedal is operated.  
There is another obstruction near one obstruction.  
During inclement weather such as rain, fog and snow.  
High or low humidity.  
High or low temperatures  
Strong winds.  
The path of travel is not flat.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat.  
Objects such as a wireless antenna, fog light, or illuminated license plate is installed  
near an ultrasonic sensor (rear).  
The orientation of an ultrasonic sensor (rear) has deviated for reasons such as a  
collision.  
The vehicle is affected by other sound waves such as the horn, engine noise, ultrasonic  
sensor of another vehicle.  
In the following cases, an ultrasonic sensor (rear) may detect something as a target  
obstruction which could cause the SCBS R system to operate.  
Driving on a steep slope.  
Wheel blocks.  
Hanging curtains, gate poles such as at toll gates and railroad crossing.  
When traveling near objects such as foliage, barriers, vehicles, walls, and fences along  
a road.  
When driving off-road in areas where there is grass and forage.  
When passing through low gates, narrow gates, car washing machines, and tunnels.  
A towing bar is installed or a trailer is connected.  
During the SBS brake control, the brake pedal may move rearward or become stiff. The  
brakes are operating, but continue to depress the brake pedal.  
When the system operates, the user is notified by the multi-information display.  
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) warning indication (amber) turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
4-200  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Automatic Brake Operation Display  
▼
When the SCBS R system is set to  
inoperable, Advanced Smart City Brake  
Support (Advanced SCBS) and the Smart  
Brake Support (SBS) are also set to  
inoperable.  
“SCBS Automatic Brake” is indicated in  
the multi-information display after the  
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) brakes  
is operated.  
NOTE  
The collision warning beep sounds  
intermittently while the Smart City  
Brake Support (SCBS) brake is  
operating.  
If the vehicle is stopped by the Smart  
City Brake Support (SCBS) operation  
and the brake pedal is not depressed, the  
warning beep sounds one time after  
about 2 seconds and the Smart City  
Brake Support (SCBS) brake is  
automatically released.  
Stopping the Smart City Brake  
Support [Reverse] (SCBS R) System  
Operation  
▼
The SCBS R system can be temporarily  
deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the SCBS R system is turned off,  
the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)  
OFF indicator light turns on.  
When the engine is restarted, the system  
becomes operational.  
4-201  
   
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Smart Brake Support  
(SBS)*  
CAUTION  
In the following cases, turn the system off  
to prevent a mis-operation:  
The SBS system alerts the driver of a  
possible collision using a display and  
warning sound if the radar sensor (front)  
and the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
determine that there is the possibility of a  
collision with a vehicle ahead while the  
vehicle is being driven at about 15 km/h or  
faster (10 mph or faster). Furthermore, if  
the radar sensor (front) and the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) determines that a  
collision is unavoidable, the automatic  
brake control is performed to reduce  
damage in the event of a collision.  
The vehicle is being towed or when  
towing another vehicle.  
The vehicle is on a chassis roller.  
When driving on rough roads such as in  
areas of dense grass or off-road.  
NOTE  
The SBS system operates when all of the  
following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The SBS system is on.  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h or  
faster (10 mph or faster).  
The relative speed between your  
vehicle and the vehicle ahead is about  
15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster).  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
is not operating.  
In addition, when the driver depresses the  
brake pedal, the brakes are applied firmly  
and quickly to assist. (Brake Assist (SBS  
brake assist))  
WARNING  
The SBS system may not operate under  
the following conditions:  
Do not rely completely on the SBS system  
and always drive carefully:  
The SBS is designed to reduce damage in  
the event of a collision, not avoid an  
accident. The ability to detect an  
If the vehicle is accelerated rapidly  
and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.  
The vehicle is driven at the same  
obstruction is limited depending on the  
obstruction, weather conditions, or traffic  
conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator  
pedal or brake pedal is mistakenly  
operated it could result in an accident.  
Always verify the safety of the surrounding  
area and depress the brake pedal or  
accelerator pedal while keeping a safer  
distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming  
vehicles.  
speed as the vehicle ahead.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is being operated.  
The selector lever is being operated.  
The turn signal is being used.  
When the vehicle ahead is not  
equipped with taillights or the  
taillights are turned off.  
*Some models.  
4-202  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When warnings and messages, such  
as a dirty windshield, related to the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are  
being displayed in the  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
Collision Warning  
▼
If there is the possibility of a collision with  
a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds  
continuously and a warning is indicated in  
the multi-information display and the  
active driving display.  
multi-information display.  
Although the objects which activate the  
system are four-wheeled vehicles, the  
radar sensor (front) could detect the  
following objects, determine them to be  
an obstruction, and operate the SBS  
system.  
Stopping The Smart Brake Support  
▼
(SBS) System Operation  
Objects on the road at the entrance to  
a curve (including guardrails and  
snow banks).  
A vehicle appears in the opposite lane  
while cornering or rounding a curve.  
When crossing a narrow bridge.  
The SBS system can be temporarily  
deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda  
Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the SBS system is turned off, the  
SBS OFF indicator light turns on.  
When passing under a low gate or  
through a tunnel or narrow gate.  
When entering an underground  
parking area.  
Metal objects, bumps, or protruding  
objects on the road.  
If you suddenly come close to a  
vehicle ahead.  
When driving in areas where there is  
high grass or forage.  
Two-wheeled vehicles such as  
When the engine is restarted, the system  
becomes operational.  
NOTE  
If the SBS system operation is turned off,  
the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)  
system operation is turned off  
simultaneously.  
motorbikes or bicycles.  
Pedestrians or non-metallic objects  
such as standing trees.  
During the SBS brake control, the brake  
pedal may move rearward or become  
stiff. The brakes are operating, but  
continue to depress the brake pedal.  
When the system operates, the user is  
notified by the multi-information  
display.  
The SBS warning indication (amber)  
turns on when the system has a  
malfunction.  
4-203  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
360° View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))*  
The 360° View Monitor consists of the following functions which assist the driver in  
checking the area surrounding the vehicle using various indications in the center display and  
a warning sound while the vehicle is being driven at low speeds or while parking.  
Top view  
The top view displays an image of the vehicle from directly above on the center display  
by combining the images taken from the 4 cameras set on all sides of the vehicle. The top  
view displays on the right side of the screen when the front view or rear view screen is  
being displayed. The top view assists the driver in checking the area surrounding the  
vehicle when the vehicle is moving forward or in reverse.  
Front view/front wide view  
The image from the front of the vehicle is displayed on the center display.  
The view from the front assists the driver in checking the front of the vehicle by  
displaying guide lines on the displayed image taken from the front of the vehicle.  
Side view  
The images taken from the front left and right sides of the vehicle are displayed on the  
center display.  
The side view assists the driver in checking the front sides of the vehicle by displaying  
guide lines on the displayed image taken from the front left and right sides of the vehicle.  
Rear view/rear wide view  
The image from the rear of the vehicle is displayed on the center display.  
The image from the rear assists the driver in checking the rear of the vehicle by displaying  
guide lines on the displayed image taken from the rear of the vehicle.  
Parking sensor  
If there are any obstructions near the vehicle while the top view/side view is displayed, an  
obstruction detection indication on the center display turns on.  
The parking sensors use ultrasonic sensors to detect obstructions around the vehicle when  
the vehicle is driven at low speeds, such as during garage or parallel parking, and notifies  
the driver of the approximate distance from the vehicle to the surrounding obstruction  
using sound and an obstruction detection indication.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)  
If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle while the rear view/  
rear wide view is displayed, a warning is displayed on the center display.  
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) uses radar sensors (rear) to detect vehicles  
approaching from the rear left and right sides of the vehicle, and it assists the driver in  
checking the rear of the vehicle while reversing by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning lights and activating the warning sound.  
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-142.  
*Some models.  
4-204  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
360°View Monitor Range  
: Cameras  
: Ultrasonic sensors  
: Radar sensors (rear)  
WARNING  
Always confirm the safety of the area around the vehicle with the mirrors and directly with  
your eyes when driving.  
The 360°View Monitor is an auxiliary device which assists the driver in checking the safety of  
the area around the vehicle.  
The shooting range of the cameras and detection range of the sensors are limited. For  
example, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the seams where  
each of the camera images merge are blind spots where an obstruction may not be visible. In  
addition, the extended vehicle width lines and projected vehicle path lines are only to be used  
as references, and the images on the screen may differ from the actual conditions.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the 360°View Monitor under any of the following conditions.  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.  
4-205  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The front doors or the liftgate is not fully closed.  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
The door mirrors are retracted.  
Do not hit the front/rear camera, front bumper, and door mirrors forcefully. The camera  
position or installation angle may shift.  
The cameras are of a waterproof structure. Do not disassemble, modify, or remove a  
camera.  
The camera cover is made of hard plastic, therefore do not apply oil film remover, organic  
solvents, wax, or coating agents. If any such agent gets on the camera cover, wipe it off  
using a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera lens forcefully, or clean it with an abrasive or hard brush. Otherwise,  
it could scratch the camera lens and negatively affect the images.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for repair, painting, or replacement of the front/rear  
camera, front bumper and door mirrors.  
Heed the following cautions to assure that the 360°View Monitor operates normally.  
Do not modify the vehicle suspensions or lower/raise the vehicle body, or both.  
Always use wheels of the specified type and size for the front and rear wheels. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
When the display is cold, images may leave trails or the screen might be darker than usual,  
making it difficult to check the vehicle surroundings. Always confirm the safety at the front  
and around the vehicle visually when driving.  
The method for parking/stopping the vehicle using the 360°View Monitor differs depending  
on the road circumstances/conditions and the vehicle conditions. When and how much you  
turn the steering wheel will differ depending on the situation, therefore always check the  
vehicle surroundings directly with your eyes while using the system.  
Also, before using the system, always make sure that the vehicle can be parked/stopped in  
the parking/stopping space.  
NOTE  
If there are water droplets, snow, or mud on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth.  
If the camera lens is especially dirty, wash it off with mild detergent.  
If the area where the camera is installed, such as the liftgate or door mirrors, has been  
damaged in a vehicle accident, the camera (position, installation angle) may have shifted.  
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
If the camera is subjected to excessive changes in temperature such as by pouring hot  
water on the camera during cold weather, the 360°View Monitor may not operate  
normally.  
If the battery voltage is low, the screen might be temporarily difficult to view, however,  
this does not indicate a problem.  
4-206  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The 360°View Monitor has limitations. Objects under the bumper or near both ends of the  
bumper cannot be displayed.  
Obstructions above the upper image range of the camera are not displayed.  
Under the following conditions, the screen might be difficult to view, however this does  
not indicate a problem.  
The temperature near the lens is high/low.  
Rainy conditions, water droplets on the camera, or high humidity.  
Mud or foreign matter near the camera.  
Extremely bright light such as sunlight or headlights hitting the camera lens directly.  
Because the 360°View Monitor camera uses a special lens, the distance displayed on the  
screen differs from the actual distance.  
Obstructions displayed on the screen may appear differently than in actuality.  
(Obstructions may appear fallen, larger, or longer than they actually are.)  
Do not apply stickers to a camera or the area around it. In addition, do not install  
accessories or an illuminated number/character license plate to the area around a  
camera. Otherwise, the camera may not correctly display the surrounding conditions.  
4-207  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Types of Images Displayed on the Screen  
▼
Top view/Front view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the vehicle front.  
Top view screen  
Front view screen  
Front wide view  
Displays the image of the front of the vehicle (wide-area).  
Side view  
Displays the image of the left and right sides of the vehicle.  
4-208  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top view/Rear view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the rear of the vehicle.  
Top view screen  
Rear view screen  
Rear wide view  
Displays the image of the rear of the vehicle (wide-area).  
4-209  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to Use the System  
▼
Top view/Front view, Front wide view, Side view  
Indication  
Images are displayed on the screen when the 360°View Monitor switch is pressed with all of  
the following conditions met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The selector lever is in a position other than R.  
4-210  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display switching  
You can change the displayed screen by pressing the commander knob or by touching the  
switch camera icon on the screen while the top view/front view, front wide view, or the side  
view is displayed.  
Switch camera icon  
Top view/Front view  
Front wide view  
Side view  
NOTE  
When the selector lever is in R position, the displayed screen does not switch to the top  
view/front view, front wide view, or the side view.  
Display of the top view/front view, front wide view, or the side view stops even with the  
display conditions met if any of the following conditions occurs.  
4-211  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When a switch around the commander knob is pressed.  
The selector lever is shifted to P position (displayed when the selector lever is in a  
position other than P).  
(Displayed when vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h (9.3 mph))  
4 minutes and 30 seconds have passed.  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster.  
(Displayed when the vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster)  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster after 8 seconds have passed  
since pressing the 360°View Monitor switch.  
4 minutes and 22 seconds have passed from the point when the vehicle speed was less  
than 15 km/h (9.3 mph) after 8 seconds have passed since pressing the 360° View  
Monitor switch.  
The 360°View Monitor displays the previously displayed screen.  
The 360° View Monitor settings can be changed as follows.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Automatic display of the 360°View Monitor when the ultrasonic sensor detects an  
obstruction.  
Automatic display of the 360°View Monitor when the ignition is switched ON.  
Top view/Rear view, Rear wide view  
The top view/rear view, rear wide view displays when all of the following conditions are  
met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
Selector lever is in R position.  
4-212  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display switching  
The displayed screen can be switched by pressing the commander knob or by touching the  
switch camera icon on the screen while the top view/rear view, rear wide view is displayed.  
Switch camera icon  
Top view/Rear view  
Rear wide view  
NOTE  
The top view/rear view and rear wide view automatically display whether or not the 360°  
View Monitor switch is turned on or off when shifting the selector lever to R position.  
The setting can be changed to display the top view/front view when shifting from reverse  
to a forward gear without operating the 360°View Monitor switch to check the front of the  
vehicle while parallel parking.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-213  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Screen operation/icon  
WARNING  
Always stop the vehicle when adjusting the 360°View Monitor image quality.  
Do not adjust the 360°View Monitor image quality while driving. If you adjust the 360° View  
Monitor image quality (such as brightness, contrast, tone, and color density) while driving, it  
could lead to an unexpected accident.  
(Display example)  
Display/Icon  
View status icon  
Content  
Indicates which image is displayed among the front view/front  
wide view/side view/rear view/rear wide view.  
Parking sensor status icon  
Indicates that the parking sensor has a problem or it is switch‐  
ed off.  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) status Indicates that the radar sensor (rear) has a problem or it is  
icon  
turned off.  
Switch camera icon  
Each time the screen is touched, the display screen switches.  
Setting icon  
The image quality for the 360°View Monitor can be adjusted.  
Top View/Front View  
▼
Use the top view/front view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
4-214  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display range  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the whole screen may be affected and it may display in that color.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The entire screen may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination level around  
any of the cameras.  
4-215  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is on)  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is off)  
-a  
-b  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Parking sensor view  
Displays the parking sensor detection condition when the  
parking sensor is activated.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection  
indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with the  
steering wheel operation.  
Projected vehicle path lines (yellow)  
Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the edge of the front bumper is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the inner side of the vehicle is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle and the dis‐  
tance guide lines (red/blue)  
tance (from front end of bumper) in front of the vehicle.  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the front end of the bumper.  
The blue lines indicate the points from about 0.5 m (19 in)  
and up to 2 m (78 in) from the front end of the bumper.  
Projected vehicle path distance guide Indicates the distance (from front end of bumper) in front of  
lines (red/yellow)  
the vehicle.  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the  
front end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1 m (39 in) and 2  
m (78 in) from the front end of the bumper.  
4-216  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in from  
the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety around  
the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Drive the vehicle forward while turning the steering wheel so that no obstructions come  
within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Front Wide View  
▼
Use the front wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop or entering a T-shaped intersection and intersection.  
4-217  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display range  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Target object  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle and the distance  
tance guide lines (red/blue)  
(from front end of bumper) in front of the vehicle.  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the front end of the bumper.  
The blue lines indicate the points from about 0.5 m (19 in)  
and up to 2 m (78 in) from the front end of the bumper.  
4-218  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The parking sensor obstruction detection indication does not display. Switch the screen  
display to the top view/front view or side view display if the parking sensor warning sound  
is activated.  
The front wide view screen displays the image in front of the vehicle at a wide angle and  
corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the side. Therefore, it  
differs from the actual view.  
Side View  
▼
Use the side view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when accelerating  
from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Display range  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Target object  
Viewing the screen  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is on)  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is off)  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Parking sensor view  
Displays the parking sensor detection condition when the  
parking sensor is activated.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection  
indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
4-219  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Projected vehicle path lines (yellow)  
Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
The projected vehicle path lines (yellow) indicate the path the  
inner side of the vehicle is expected to travel.  
Vehicle parallel guide lines (blue)  
Vehicle front end guide lines (blue)  
Indicates the approximate vehicle width including the door  
mirrors.  
Indicates the point about 0.25 m (9.8 in) from the front edge  
of the vehicle (front edge of the bumper).  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
B C  
A
A
B
C
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Turn the steering wheel so that the projected vehicle path lines travel inside of the  
obstruction (A), and drive the vehicle forward until it passes the obstruction.  
If the projected vehicle path lines are on an obstruction (B) or outside of the obstruction (C),  
the vehicle may contact the obstruction when turning the vehicle sharply.  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in  
from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety  
around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
4-220  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not turn the steering wheel any more until the vehicle has passed the obstruction, even  
if the obstruction is not visible on the side view image. If the steering wheel is turned even  
more, the vehicle may contact the obstruction if it is turned sharply.  
NOTE  
Because there might be a difference between the image displayed on the screen and the  
actual conditions, always check the safety of the surrounding area using the mirrors and  
directly with your eyes when driving.  
Even though the object displayed on the screen, such as a road curb or a division line of a  
parking space, and the vehicle parallel guide lines appear parallel, they may not actually  
be parallel.  
Top View/Rear View  
▼
Use the top view/rear view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Range of displayed screen image  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
4-221  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the whole screen may be affected and it may display in that color.  
Obstructions displayed in the rear view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The entire screen may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination level around  
any of the cameras.  
Viewing the screen  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is on)  
(When the projected vehicle  
path line display is off)  
-b  
-a  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Parking sensor view  
Displays the parking sensor detection condition when the  
parking sensor is activated.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection  
indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with the  
steering wheel operation.  
Projected vehicle path lines (yellow)  
Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the rear wheels are expected to  
travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the outer side of the vehicle is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the vehi‐  
tance guide lines (red/blue)  
cle and distance to a point measured from the rear of the vehi‐  
cle (from the end of the bumper).  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the rear end of the bumper.  
The blue lines indicate the points from about 0.5 m (19 in)  
and up to 2 m (78 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
4-222  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Projected vehicle path distance guide These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point  
lines (red/yellow)  
measured from the rear of the vehicle (from the end of the  
bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the  
rear end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1 m (39 in) and 2  
m (78 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning Indicates when the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has oper‐  
lights  
ated.  
For details, refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).  
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-142.  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
CAUTION  
The front of the vehicle swings out wide when turning the steering wheel while reversing.  
Maintain sufficient distance between the vehicle and an obstruction.  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in  
from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety  
around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-296.  
NOTE  
Because there might be a difference between the image displayed on the screen, such as  
indicated in the following, and the actual conditions when parking, always check the  
safety at the rear of the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
Even though the back end of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen and  
distance guide lines appear parallel, they may not actually be parallel.  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, even  
though the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear parallel, they may not  
actually be parallel.  
The following shows an example of vehicle parking with the steering wheel turned to the  
left while backing up the vehicle. When backing into a parking space from the opposite  
direction, the steering operation is reversed.  
4-223  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
1. Back the vehicle into the parking space by turning the steering wheel so that the vehicle  
enters the center of the parking space.  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
2. After the vehicle starts entering the parking space, stop and adjust the steering wheel so  
that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on  
the left and right are roughly equal, and then continue backing up slowly.  
4-224  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
3. Once the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left and right are  
parallel, straighten the wheels and back the vehicle slowly into the parking space.  
Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle in the best  
possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the vehicle  
width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Rear Wide View  
▼
Use the rear wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
4-225  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Range of displayed screen image  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Target object  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the vehi‐  
tance guide lines (red/blue)  
cle and distance to a point measured from the rear of the vehi‐  
cle (from the end of the bumper).  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the rear end of the bumper.  
The blue lines indicate the points from about 0.5 m (19 in)  
and up to 2 m (78 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
4-226  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display/Icon  
Content  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning Indicates when the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has oper‐  
lights  
ated.  
For details, refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).  
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-142.  
NOTE  
The parking sensor obstruction detection indication does not display. Switch the screen  
display to the top view/rear view display if the parking sensor warning sound is activated.  
The rear wide view screen displays the image at the rear of the vehicle at a wide angle  
and corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the side. Therefore, it  
differs from the actual view.  
Margin of Error Between Road Surface on Screen and Actual Road Surface  
▼
There might be some margin of error between the road surface appearing on the screen and  
the actual road surface. A margin of error in the perceived distance could lead to an  
accident, therefore be aware of the following conditions which can more easily produce  
errors in the perceived distance.  
The vehicle tilts due to weight of passengers and cargo.  
If the vehicle is tilted, obstructions picked up by a camera can appear farther or closer than  
the actual distance from the vehicle.  
Front camera  
Obstruction  
Margin of error  
4-227  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side camera  
Obstruction  
Margin of error  
Rear camera  
Margin of error  
Obstruction  
There is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle  
If there is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle,  
obstructions picked up by the camera can appear farther or closer than the actual distance  
from the vehicle.  
4-228  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Front camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
A
B
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Actual obstruction  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
Side camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
B
A
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
Rear camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
A
B
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Obstruction appearing on screen  
Actual obstruction  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
4-229  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is on a slope, obstructions taken by the camera can appear farther or closer  
than the actual distance from the vehicle.  
Three-dimensional object at vehicle front or rear  
Because the vehicle front end guide lines (side camera) or the distance guide lines (rear  
camera) are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the three-dimensional object  
displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.  
Side camera  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Rear camera  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
A
B
C
A
C B  
Actual distance B > C = A  
Sensed distance on screen A > B > C  
System Problem Indication  
▼
Center display indication  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
“No image signal reception” is dis‐  
played  
Have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The control unit might be damaged.  
The camera might be damaged.  
Screen is pitch-black and blank  
4-230  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
360° View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))*  
360° View Monitor  
▼
The 360°View Monitor consists of the following functions which assist the driver in  
checking the area surrounding the vehicle using various indications in the center display and  
a warning sound while the vehicle is being driven at low speeds or while parking.  
Top view  
The top view displays an image of the vehicle from directly above on the center display  
by combining the images taken from the 4 cameras set on all sides of the vehicle. The top  
view displays on the right side of the screen when the front view or rear view screen is  
being displayed. The top view assists the driver in checking the area surrounding the  
vehicle when the vehicle is moving forward or in reverse.  
Front view/front wide view  
The image from the front of the vehicle is displayed on the center display.  
The view from the front assists the driver in checking the front of the vehicle by  
displaying guide lines on the displayed image taken from the front of the vehicle.  
Side view  
The images taken from the front left and right sides of the vehicle are displayed on the  
center display.  
The side view assists the driver in checking the front sides of the vehicle by displaying  
guide lines on the displayed image taken from the front left and right sides of the vehicle.  
Rear view/rear wide view  
The image from the rear of the vehicle is displayed on the center display.  
The image from the rear assists the driver in checking the rear of the vehicle by displaying  
guide lines on the displayed image taken from the rear of the vehicle.  
Parking sensor  
If there are any obstructions near the vehicle while the top view/side view is displayed, an  
obstruction detection indication turns on around the bumper in the center display.  
The parking sensors use ultrasonic sensors to detect obstructions around the vehicle when  
the vehicle is driven at low speeds, such as during garage or parallel parking, and notifies  
the driver of the approximate distance from the vehicle to the surrounding obstruction  
using sound and an obstruction detection indication.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-305.  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)  
If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle while the rear view/  
rear wide view is displayed, a warning is displayed on the center display.  
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) uses rear side radar sensor to detect vehicles  
approaching from the rear left and right sides of the vehicle, and it assists the driver in  
checking the rear of the vehicle while reversing by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning lights and activating the warning sound.  
*Some models.  
4-231  
   
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-142.  
360°View Monitor Range  
: Cameras  
: Ultrasonic sensors  
: Radar sensors (rear)  
WARNING  
Always confirm the safety of the area around the vehicle with the mirrors and directly with  
your eyes when driving:  
The 360°View Monitor is an auxiliary device which assists the driver in checking the safety of  
the area around the vehicle.  
The shooting range of the cameras and detection range of the sensors are limited. For  
example, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the seams where  
each of the camera images merge are blind spots where an obstruction may not be visible. In  
addition, the extended vehicle width lines and projected vehicle path lines are only to be used  
as references, and the images on the screen may differ from the actual conditions.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the 360°View Monitor under any of the following conditions.  
4-232  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.  
The front or rear doors are not fully closed.  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
The door mirrors are retracted.  
Do not hit the front/rear camera, front bumper, liftgate, and door mirrors forcefully. The  
camera position or installation angle may shift.  
The cameras are waterproof. Do not disassemble, modify, or remove a camera.  
The camera cover is made of hard plastic, therefore do not apply oil film remover, organic  
solvents, wax, or coating agents. If any such agent gets on the camera cover, wipe it off  
using a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera lens forcefully, or clean it with an abrasive or hard brush. Otherwise,  
it could scratch the camera lens and negatively affect the images.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for repair, painting, or replacement of the front/rear  
camera, front bumper, liftgate and door mirrors.  
Heed the following cautions to assure that the 360°View Monitor operates normally.  
Do not modify the vehicle suspensions or lower/raise the vehicle body, or both.  
Always use tires of the specified type and size for the front and rear wheels. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
When the display is cold, images may leave trails or the screen might be darker than usual,  
making it difficult to check the vehicle surroundings. Always confirm the safety at the front  
and around the vehicle visually when driving.  
The method for parking/stopping the vehicle using the 360°View Monitor differs depending  
on the road circumstances/conditions and the vehicle conditions. When and how much you  
turn the steering wheel will differ depending on the situation, therefore always check the  
vehicle surroundings directly with your eyes while using the system.  
Also, before using the system, always make sure that the vehicle can be parked/stopped in  
the parking/stopping space.  
NOTE  
If there are water droplets, snow, or mud on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth.  
If the camera lens is especially dirty, wash it off with mild detergent.  
If the camera lens is touched or there is any dirt on it, it could affect the screen image.  
Wipe the lens using a soft cloth.  
If the area where the camera is installed, such as the front bumper, liftgate or door  
mirrors, has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the camera (position, installation angle)  
may have shifted. Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle  
inspected.  
4-233  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the camera is subjected to excessive changes in temperature such as by pouring hot  
water on the camera during cold weather, the 360°View Monitor may not operate  
normally.  
If the battery voltage is low, the screen might be temporarily difficult to view, however,  
this does not indicate a problem.  
The 360°View Monitor has limitations. Objects under the bumper or near both ends of the  
bumper cannot be displayed.  
Obstructions above the upper image range of the camera are not displayed.  
Under the following conditions, the screen might be difficult to view, however this does  
not indicate a problem.  
The temperature near the lens is high/low.  
Rainy conditions, water droplets on the camera, or high humidity.  
Mud or foreign matter near the camera.  
Extremely bright light such as sunlight or headlights hitting the camera lens directly.  
The surroundings are illuminated by vehicle lights, fluorescent lights, or LED lights  
(display may flicker).  
Extremely small dark or white dots appear on the screen (dots may flicker).  
Because the 360°View Monitor camera uses a special lens, the distance displayed on the  
screen differs from the actual distance.  
Obstructions displayed on the screen may appear differently than in actuality.  
(Obstructions may appear fallen, larger, or longer than they actually are.)  
Do not apply stickers to a camera or the area around it. In addition, do not install  
accessories or an illuminated number/character license plate to the area around a  
camera. Otherwise, the camera may not correctly display the surrounding conditions.  
Only rear and rear wide images displayed on the monitor from the 360° view monitor  
camera are reversed images (mirror images).  
Free/open source software information  
This product includes free/open sources. Information about the licensing and source code  
is available at the following URL.  
https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/svss/mazda/  
4-234  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Types of Images Displayed on the Screen  
▼
Top view/Front view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the vehicle front.  
Top view screen  
Front view screen  
Top view/Front wide view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the front of the vehicle (wide-area).  
Top view screen  
Front wide view screen  
4-235  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side view  
Displays the image of the left and right sides of the vehicle.  
Top view/Rear view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the rear of the vehicle.  
Top view screen  
Rear view screen  
4-236  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top view/Rear wide view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the rear of the vehicle (wide-area).  
Top view screen  
Rear wide view screen  
How to Use the System  
▼
Top view/Front view, Top view/Front wide view, Side view  
Indication  
Images are displayed on the screen when the 360°View Monitor switch is pressed with all of  
the following conditions met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
4-237  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The selector lever is in a position other than R.  
Display switching  
The displayed screen can be changed each time the 360°view monitor switch is pressed.  
Top view/Front view  
Top view/Front wide view  
Home screen  
Side view  
NOTE  
When the selector lever is in R position, the displayed screen does not switch to the top  
view/front view, top view/front wide view, or the side view.  
Display of the top view/front view, top view/front wide view, or the side view stops even  
with the display conditions met if any of the following conditions occurs.  
When a switch around the commander knob is pressed.  
The selector lever is shifted to P position (displayed when the selector lever is in a  
position other than P).  
(Displayed when vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h (9.3 mph))  
4 minutes and 30 seconds have passed.  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster.  
(Displayed when the vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster)  
4-238  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster after 8 seconds have passed  
since pressing the 360°View Monitor switch.  
4 minutes and 22 seconds have passed from the point when the vehicle speed was less  
than 15 km/h (9.3 mph) after 8 seconds have passed since pressing the 360°View  
Monitor switch.  
The 360°View Monitor settings can be changed as follows.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Automatic display of the 360°View Monitor when the ultrasonic sensor detects an  
obstruction.  
Automatic display of the 360°View Monitor when the ignition is switched ON.  
Screen priority level when the system launches.  
Top view/Rear view, Top view/Rear wide view  
The top view/rear view, top view/rear wide view displays when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
Selector lever is in R position.  
Display switching  
The displayed screen can be changed each time the 360°view monitor switch is pressed.  
Top view/Rear view  
Top view/Rear wide view  
NOTE  
The top view/rear view and top view/rear wide view automatically display whether or not  
the 360°View Monitor switch is turned on or off when shifting the selector lever to R  
position.  
The top view/rear view and top view/rear wide view displays the previously displayed  
screen.  
The setting can be changed to display the top view/front view when shifting from reverse  
to a forward gear without operating the 360°View Monitor switch to check the front of the  
vehicle while parallel parking.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-239  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Screen operation/icon  
WARNING  
Always stop the vehicle when adjusting the 360°View Monitor image quality.  
Do not adjust the 360°View Monitor image quality while driving. If you adjust the 360°View  
Monitor image quality (such as brightness, contrast, tone, and color density) while driving, it  
could lead to an unexpected accident.  
Display/Icon  
(1) View status icon  
Content  
Indicates which image is displayed among the front view/front  
wide view/side view/rear view/rear wide view.  
(2) Parking sensor status icon  
Indicates that the parking sensor has a problem or it is switch‐  
ed off.  
Top View/Front View  
▼
Use the top view/front view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
4-240  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display range  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the screen area for each camera may be affected and it may display in that  
color.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination  
level around any of the cameras.  
4-241  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with the  
steering wheel operation.  
(2) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow & Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
red)  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the edge of the front bumper is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the inner side of the vehicle is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
(3) Extended vehicle width lines (blue)  
Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle.  
(4) Projected vehicle path distance guide Indicates the distance (from front end of bumper) in front of  
lines (yellow & red)  
the vehicle.  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the  
front end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39 in) and  
2.0 m (78 in) from the front end of the bumper.  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in from  
the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety around  
the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-305.  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-242  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Drive the vehicle forward while turning the steering wheel so that no obstructions come  
within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Top View/Front Wide View  
▼
Use the top view/front wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area  
when accelerating from a stop or entering a T-shaped intersection and intersection.  
4-243  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display range  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the screen area for each camera may be affected and it may display in that  
color.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination  
level around any of the cameras.  
4-244  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle and the distance  
tance guide lines (blue & red)  
(from front end of bumper) in front of the vehicle.  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the front end of the bumper.  
NOTE  
The front wide view screen displays the image in front of the vehicle at a wide angle and  
corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the side. Therefore, it  
differs from the actual view.  
Side View  
▼
Use the side view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when accelerating  
from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
4-245  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display range  
Target object  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow)  
Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
The projected vehicle path lines (yellow) indicate the path the  
inner side of the vehicle is expected to travel.  
(2) Vehicle parallel guide lines (blue)  
Indicates the approximate vehicle width including the door  
mirrors.  
4-246  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(3) Vehicle front end guide lines (blue)  
Indicates the point about 0.25 m (9.8 in) from the front edge  
of the vehicle (front edge of the bumper).  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Turn the steering wheel so that the projected vehicle path lines travel inside of the  
obstruction (A), and drive the vehicle forward until it passes the obstruction.  
If the projected vehicle path lines are on an obstruction (B) or outside of the obstruction (C),  
the vehicle may contact the obstruction when turning the vehicle sharply.  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in  
from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety  
around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
4-247  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-305.  
Do not turn the steering wheel any more until the vehicle has passed the obstruction, even  
if the obstruction is not visible on the side view image. If the steering wheel is turned even  
more, the vehicle may contact the obstruction if it is turned sharply.  
NOTE  
Because there might be a difference between the image displayed on the screen and the  
actual conditions, always check the safety of the surrounding area using the mirrors and  
directly with your eyes when driving.  
Even though the object displayed on the screen, such as a road curb or a division line of a  
parking space, and the vehicle parallel guide lines appear parallel, they may not actually  
be parallel.  
Top View/Rear View  
▼
Use the top view/rear view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Range of displayed screen image  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
4-248  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the screen area for each camera may be affected and it may display in that  
color.  
Obstructions displayed in the rear view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination  
level around any of the cameras.  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with the  
steering wheel operation.  
(2) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow & Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
red)  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the edge of the rear bumper is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the outer side of the vehicle is ex‐  
pected to travel.  
(3) Extended vehicle width lines (blue)  
These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the vehi‐  
cle.  
(4) Projected vehicle path distance guide These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point  
lines (yellow & red)  
measured from the rear of the vehicle (from the end of the  
bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the  
rear end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39 in) and  
2.0 m (78 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
4-249  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
CAUTION  
The front of the vehicle swings out wide when turning the steering wheel while reversing.  
Maintain sufficient distance between the vehicle and an obstruction.  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions closing in  
from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always confirm the safety  
around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-305.  
NOTE  
Because there might be a difference between the image displayed on the screen, such as  
indicated in the following, and the actual conditions when parking, always check the  
safety at the rear of the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
Even though the back end of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen and  
distance guide lines appear parallel, they may not actually be parallel.  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, even  
though the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear parallel, they may not  
actually be parallel.  
The following shows an example of vehicle parking with the steering wheel turned to the  
left while backing up the vehicle. When backing into a parking space from the opposite  
direction, the steering operation is reversed.  
4-250  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
1. Back the vehicle into the parking space by turning the steering wheel so that the vehicle  
enters the center of the parking space.  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
2. After the vehicle starts entering the parking space, stop and adjust the steering wheel so  
that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on  
the left and right are roughly equal, and then continue backing up slowly.  
4-251  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
3. Once the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left and right are  
parallel, straighten the wheels and back the vehicle slowly into the parking space.  
Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle in the best  
possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the vehicle  
width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
4-252  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top View/Rear Wide View  
▼
Use the top view/rear wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area  
when accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Range of displayed screen image  
Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image and the  
seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera, the top  
view screen may display in the following ways.  
If an image containing an object with a conspicuous color is picked up by any of the  
cameras, the screen area for each camera may be affected and it may display in that  
color.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the image  
may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera images  
merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the illumination  
level around any of the cameras.  
4-253  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Extended vehicle width lines and dis‐ These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the vehi‐  
tance guide lines (blue & red)  
cle and distance to a point measured from the rear of the vehi‐  
cle (from the end of the bumper).  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the rear end of the bumper.  
NOTE  
The top view/rear wide view screen displays the image at the rear of the vehicle at a wide  
angle and corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the side.  
Therefore, it differs from the actual view.  
Margin of Error Between Road Surface on Screen and Actual Road Surface  
▼
There might be some margin of error between the road surface appearing on the screen and  
the actual road surface. A margin of error in the perceived distance could lead to an  
accident, therefore be aware of the following conditions which can more easily produce  
errors in the perceived distance.  
The vehicle tilts due to weight of passengers and cargo.  
If the vehicle is tilted, obstructions picked up by a camera can appear farther or closer than  
the actual distance from the vehicle.  
4-254  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Front camera  
Obstruction  
Margin of error  
Side camera  
Obstruction  
Margin of error  
Rear camera  
Margin of error  
Obstruction  
There is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle  
If there is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle,  
obstructions picked up by the camera can appear farther or closer than the actual distance  
from the vehicle.  
4-255  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Front camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
A
B
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Actual obstruction  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
Side camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
B
A
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
Rear camera  
Appears further than  
actual distance  
Appears closer than  
actual distance  
A
B
A
B
Actual obstruction  
Obstruction appearing  
on screen  
Obstruction appearing on screen  
Actual obstruction  
A: Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
B: Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
4-256  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is on a slope, obstructions taken by the camera can appear farther or closer  
than the actual distance from the vehicle.  
Three-dimensional object at vehicle front or rear  
Because the vehicle front end guide lines (side camera) or the distance guide lines (rear  
camera) are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the three-dimensional object  
displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.  
Side camera  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
4-257  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear camera  
(Screen display)  
Sensed distance on screen A > B > C  
(Actual condition)  
Actual distance B > C = A  
System Problem Indication  
▼
Center display indication  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
“No camera signal.” is displayed  
Screen is pitch-black and blank  
The control unit might be damaged.  
Have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The camera might be damaged.  
4-258  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)*  
Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC) is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while  
traveling at night and detects traffic lanes. The distance in which the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC) can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions.  
WARNING  
Do not modify the suspension:  
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctly detect  
vehicles ahead. This will result in the system not operating normally or mistakenly operating,  
which could cause a serious accident.  
CAUTION  
Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
*Some models.  
4-259  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens is obstructed, it will cause the  
system to not operate correctly. Consequently, each system may not operate normally  
which could lead to an unexpected accident.  
Do not disassemble or modify the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Disassembly or modification of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) will cause a malfunction  
or mistaken operation. Consequently, each system may not operate normally which could  
lead to an unexpected accident.  
Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC).  
Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to get dirty.  
Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.  
Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.  
Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or fogging.  
Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the  
windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC).  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.  
When cleaning the windshield, do not allow glass cleaners or similar cleaning fluids to  
get on the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens. In addition, do not touch the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) lens.  
When performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning of the camera lens.  
Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the area around  
it. If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is severely hit or if there are cracks or damage  
caused by flying gravel or debris in the area around it, stop using the following systems  
and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)  
Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS)  
Smart City Brake Support [Forward] (SCBS F)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
4-260  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has been finely  
adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or  
remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.  
Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same manufacturer,  
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with significantly different wear  
patterns on the same vehicle as the system may not operate normally.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield  
and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detect plastic  
shopping bags, ice or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the system cannot accurately  
determine a vehicle ahead and may not be able to operate normally. Always drive carefully  
and pay attention to the road ahead.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects  
correctly, and each system may be unable to operate normally.  
The height of the vehicle ahead is low.  
You drive your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Headlights are not turned on during the night or when going through a tunnel.  
In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be able to detect  
target objects correctly.  
Under bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.  
The window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's  
raining.  
Ice, fog, snow, frost, rainfall, dirt, or foreign matter such as a plastic bag is stuck on the  
windshield.  
Trucks with low loading platforms and vehicles with an extremely low or high profile.  
When driving next to walls with no patterning (including fences and longitudinally  
striped walls).  
The taillights of the vehicle ahead are turned off.  
A vehicle is outside the illumination range of the headlights.  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn, or ascending or descending a steep slope.  
Entering or exiting a tunnel.  
Heavy luggage is loaded causing the vehicle to tilt.  
Strong light is shone at the front of the vehicle (back light or high-beam light from  
on-coming vehicles).  
There are many light emitters on the vehicle ahead.  
When the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off at  
nighttime.  
Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC).  
4-261  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from  
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.  
When towing a malfunctioning vehicle.  
The vehicle is driven with tires having significantly different wear.  
The vehicle is driven on down slopes or bumpy roads.  
There are water puddles on the road.  
The surroundings are dark such as during the night, early evening, or early morning, or  
in a tunnel or indoor parking lot.  
The illumination brightness of the headlights is reduced or the headlight illumination is  
weakened due to dirt or a deviated optical axis.  
The target object enters the blind spot of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
A person or object bursts onto the road from the shoulder or cuts right in front of you.  
You change lanes and approach a vehicle ahead.  
When driving extremely close to the target object.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.  
The vehicle ahead has a special shape. For example, a vehicle towing a trailer house or  
a boat, or a vehicle carrier carrying a vehicle with its front pointed rearward.  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot operate normally due to backlight or fog,  
the system functions related to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are temporarily  
stopped and the following warning lights turn on. However, this does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
High Beam Control System (HBC) warning light (amber)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning  
indication  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) warning indication  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) warning indication  
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) warning indication/  
warning light (amber)  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot operate normally due to high temperatures,  
the system functions related to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are temporarily  
stopped and the following warning lights turn on. However, this does not indicate a  
malfunction. Cool down the area around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) such as by  
turning on the air conditioner.  
High Beam Control System (HBC) warning light (amber)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning  
indication  
4-262  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) warning indication  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) warning indication  
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) warning indication/  
warning light (amber)  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects that the windshield is dirty or foggy, the  
system functions related to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are temporarily stopped  
and the following warning lights turn on. However, this does not indicate a problem.  
Remove the dirt from the windshield or press the defroster switch and defog the  
windshield.  
High Beam Control System (HBC) warning light (amber)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning  
indication  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) warning indication  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) warning indication  
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) warning indication/  
warning light (amber)  
If there are recognizable cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris on the  
windshield, always have the windshield replaced. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for replacement.  
(With Advanced Smart City Brake Support (Advanced SCBS))  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes pedestrians when all of the following  
conditions are met:  
The height of a pedestrian is about 1 to 2 meters.  
An outline such as the head, both shoulders, or the legs can be determined.  
In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be able to detect  
target objects correctly:  
Multiple pedestrians are walking, or there are groups of people.  
A pedestrian is close to a separate object.  
A pedestrian is crouching, lying, or slouching.  
A pedestrian suddenly jumps into the road right in front of the vehicle.  
A pedestrian opens an umbrella, or is carrying large baggage or articles.  
A pedestrian is in a dark location such as during the night, or blends into the  
background by wearing clothes matching the background color.  
4-263  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Radar Sensor (Front)*  
Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor (front).  
The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).  
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)  
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead  
or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.  
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the front emblem.  
Radar sensor (front)  
If “Front Radar Sensor Blocked” is displayed in the multi-information display of the  
instrument cluster, clean the area around the radar sensor (front).  
CAUTION  
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.  
Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the radiator grille  
and front emblem in and around the radar sensor (front), and do not replace the radiator  
grille and front emblem with any product that is not a genuine product designed for use  
with the radar sensor (front).  
The radar sensor (front) includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor's front  
surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may require  
time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice or snow. If this occurs, the  
system may not operate correctly, therefore always keep the radar sensor (front) clean.  
Do not install a grille guard.  
If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the position of the  
radar sensor (front) may have moved. Stop the system immediately and always have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
*Some models.  
4-264  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when pulling  
out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor (front) could be hit and its position  
deviated.  
Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor (front).  
For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor (front), consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modified, the vehicle's posture could  
change and the radar sensor (front) may not be able to correctly detect a vehicle ahead or  
an obstruction.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect vehicles  
ahead or obstructions correctly and each system may not operate normally.  
The rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not reflect radio waves effectively, such as an  
unloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top,  
vehicles with a hard plastic tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.  
Vehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for reflecting radio waves.  
Visibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water, snow, or sand from its tires  
and onto your windshield.  
The luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are  
occupied.  
Ice, snow, or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem.  
During inclement weather such as rain, snow, or sand storms.  
When driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves.  
Under the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect vehicles  
ahead or obstructions.  
The beginning and end of a curve.  
Roads with continuous curves.  
Narrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures.  
The vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor's blind spot.  
The vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage.  
Roads with repeated up and down slopes  
Driving on poor roads or unpaved roads.  
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short.  
A vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane.  
To prevent incorrect operation of the system, use tires of the same specified size,  
manufacturer, brand, and tread pattern on all four wheels. In addition, do not use tires  
with significantly different wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle (Including  
the temporary spare tire).  
If the battery power is weak, the system may not operate correctly.  
4-265  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When driving on roads with little traffic and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for the  
radar sensor (front) to detect, “Front Radar Sensor Blocked” may be temporarily  
displayed, however, this does not indicate a problem.  
The radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which  
the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is driven abroad, authorization from the country in  
which the vehicle is driven may be required.  
4-266  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Radar Sensors (Rear)*  
Your vehicle is equipped with radar sensors (rear). The following systems also use the radar  
sensors (rear).  
Blind Spot Monitoring system (BSM)  
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)  
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle  
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.  
Radar sensors (rear)  
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right  
sides.  
Always keep the surface of the rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) clean so that the  
radar sensors (rear) operate normally. Also, do not apply items such as stickers.  
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-49.  
CAUTION  
If the rear bumper receives a severe impact, the system may no longer operate normally. Stop  
the system immediately and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
The detection ability of the radar sensors (rear) has limitations. In the following cases,  
the detection ability may lower and the system may not operate normally.  
The rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) has become deformed.  
Snow, ice or mud adheres to the radar sensors (rear) on the rear bumper.  
Under bad weather conditions such as rain, snow and fog.  
Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it  
may be difficult to detect them.  
Stationary objects on a road or a road side such as small, two-wheeled vehicles,  
bicycles, pedestrians, animals, and shopping carts.  
*Some models.  
4-267  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Vehicle shapes which do not reflect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low  
vehicle height and sports cars.  
Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors (rear) adjusted for each  
vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors (rear) detect approaching  
vehicles correctly. If the direction of the radar sensors (rear) has deviated for some  
reason, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
For repairs or replacement of the radar sensors (rear), or bumper repairs, paintwork, and  
replacement near the radar sensors, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Turn off the system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier  
is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted by the radar will  
be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.  
The radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which  
the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is driven abroad, authorization from the country in  
which the vehicle is driven may be required.  
4-268  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Ultrasonic Sensor (Rear)*  
The ultrasonic sensors (rear) function by emitting ultrasonic waves which are reflected off  
obstructions at the rear and the returning ultrasonic waves are picked up by the ultrasonic  
sensors (rear).  
Ultrasonic sensor (rear)  
The ultrasonic sensors (rear) are mounted in the rear bumper.  
*Some models.  
4-269  
 
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Front Camera/Side Cameras/Rear Camera*  
Your vehicle is equipped with a front camera, side cameras, and a rear camera. The 360°  
View Monitor uses each camera.  
The front camera, side cameras, and rear camera shoot images of the area surrounding the  
vehicle.  
Each camera is installed to the following positions.  
Side camera  
Side camera  
Front camera  
Rear camera  
*Some models.  
4-270  
 
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
Cruise Control*  
With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about  
25 km/h (16 mph).  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:  
Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in loss  
of vehicle control.  
Hilly terrain  
Steep inclines  
Heavy or unsteady traffic  
Slippery or winding roads  
Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed  
Cruise Control Switch  
▼
RESUME/+ switch  
SET/- switch  
ON switch  
OFF/CANCEL switch  
NOTE  
If your Mazda has the following steering switch, your Mazda is equipped with the Mazda  
Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go function) system.  
*Some models.  
4-271  
 
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) on page 4-146.  
switch  
SET+ switch  
RES switch  
switch  
SET- switch  
MODE switch  
CANCEL switch  
OFF switch  
Leaving the cruise control system in an  
activation-ready state while the cruise  
control is not in use is dangerous as the  
cruise control could unexpectedly activate  
if the activation button is accidentally  
pressed, and result in loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
Cruise Main Indication (White)/  
Cruise Set Indication (Green)  
▼
NOTE  
The indication has 2 colors.  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the  
system status before it was turned off is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is  
switched OFF with the cruise control  
system operable, the system will be  
operable when the ignition is switched ON  
the next time.  
Cruise Main Indication (White)  
The indication turns on (white) when the  
cruise control system is activated.  
Cruise Set Indication (Green)  
The indication turns on (green) when a  
cruising speed has been set.  
Activation  
To activate the system, press the ON  
switch. The cruise main indication (white)  
turns on.  
Activation/Deactivation  
▼
WARNING  
Deactivation  
To deactivate the system, press the OFF/  
CANCEL switch.  
The cruise main indication (white) turns  
off.  
Always turn off the cruise control system  
when it is not in use:  
4-272  
 
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise  
control is displayed in the instrument  
cluster and the active driving display  
(vehicles with active driving display).  
Instrument Cluster  
To Set Speed  
▼
1. Activate the cruise control system by  
pressing the ON switch. The cruise  
main indication (white) turns on.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which  
must be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).  
3. Set the cruise control by pressing the  
SET/ switch at the desired speed. The  
cruise control is set at the moment the  
SET/ switch is pressed. Release the  
accelerator pedal simultaneously. The  
cruise set indication (green) turns on.  
Type A  
*1  
*1: Needle indicates set speed.  
NOTE  
Type B  
Type C  
The cruise control speed setting cannot  
be performed under the following  
conditions:  
The selector lever is in the P or N  
position.  
The parking brake is applied.  
Active Driving Display  
Release the SET/ or RESUME/  
switch at the desired speed, otherwise  
the speed will continue increasing while  
the RESUME/ switch is pressed and  
held, and continue decreasing while the  
SET/ switch is pressed and held  
(except when the accelerator pedal is  
depressed).  
On a steep grade, the vehicle may  
momentarily slow down while ascending  
or speed up while descending.  
To Increase Cruising Speed  
▼
Follow either of these procedures.  
To increase speed using cruise control  
switch  
Press the RESUME/ switch and hold it.  
Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the  
switch at the desired speed.  
The cruise control will cancel if the  
vehicle speed decreases below 21 km/h  
(13 mph) when the cruise control is  
activated, such as when climbing a steep  
grade.  
Press the RESUME/ switch and release  
it immediately to adjust the preset speed.  
Multiple operations will increase the  
preset speed according to the number of  
times it is operated.  
The cruise control may cancel at about  
15 km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed,  
such as when climbing a long, steep  
grade.  
4-273  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
Increasing speed with a single  
RESUME/ switch operation  
pedal) and the system is still activated, the  
most recent set speed will automatically  
resume when the RESUME/ switch is  
pressed.  
If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16  
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 25  
km/h (16 mph) or more and press the  
RESUME/ switch.  
Instrument cluster display for vehicle  
speed indicated in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)  
Instrument cluster display for vehicle  
speed indicated in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
To Temporarily Cancel  
▼
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate  
to the desired speed. Press the SET/  
switch and release it immediately.  
To temporarily cancel the system, use one  
of these methods:  
Slightly depress the brake pedal.  
Press the OFF/CANCEL switch.  
NOTE  
Accelerate if you want to speed up  
temporarily when the cruise control is on.  
Greater speed will not interfere with or  
change the set speed. Take your foot off  
the accelerator to return to the set speed.  
If the RESUME/ switch is pressed when  
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or  
higher, the system reverts to the previously  
set speed.  
To Decrease Cruising Speed  
NOTE  
▼
If any of the following conditions occur,  
the cruise control system is temporarily  
canceled.  
Press the SET/ switch and hold it. The  
vehicle will gradually slow.  
Release the switch at the desired speed.  
The parking brake is applied.  
The selector lever is in the P or N  
Press the SET/ switch and release it  
immediately to adjust the preset speed.  
Multiple operations will decrease the  
preset speed according to the number of  
times it is operated.  
position.  
When the cruise control system is  
temporarily canceled by even one of the  
applicable cancel conditions, the speed  
cannot be re-set.  
Decreasing speed with a single SET/  
switch operation  
The cruise control cannot be cancelled  
while driving in manual mode (selector  
lever shifted from D to M position).  
Therefore, engine braking will not be  
applied even if the transaxle is shifted  
down to a lower gear. If deceleration is  
required, lower the set speed or depress  
the brake pedal.  
Instrument cluster display for vehicle  
speed indicated in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)  
Instrument cluster display for vehicle  
speed indicated in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)  
To Resume Cruising Speed at More  
Than 25 km/h (16 mph)  
▼
If the cruise control system temporarily  
canceled (such as by applying the brake  
4-274  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
To Deactivate  
▼
When a cruising speed has been set  
(cruise set indication (green) turns on)  
Long-press the OFF/CANCEL switch or  
press the OFF/CANCEL switch 2 times.  
When a cruising speed has not been set  
(cruise main indication (white) turns  
on)  
Press the OFF/CANCEL switch.  
4-275  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.  
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the  
warning light in the instrument cluster and by the warning beep sound.  
Refer to Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected on page 7-25.  
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-31.  
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep on page 7-44.  
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to  
the receiver unit in the vehicle.  
Tire pressure sensors  
NOTE  
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also  
lower. When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS  
warning light may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving,  
and check tire pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures,  
use of a digital tire pressure gauge is recommended.  
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires  
regularly.  
CAUTION  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and  
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle  
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the  
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine  
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)  
4-276  
 
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring  
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is  
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you  
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can  
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the  
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not  
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when  
the system is not operating properly.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then  
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle  
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,  
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS  
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement  
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.  
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on  
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to  
continue to function properly.  
To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem. As  
a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow out.  
When using the following devices in the  
vehicle that may cause radio  
interference with the receiver unit.  
System Error Activation  
▼
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A system error activation may occur in the  
following cases:  
A digital device such as a personal  
computer.  
A current converter device such as a  
DC-AC converter.  
When there is equipment or a device  
When excess snow or ice adheres to the  
vehicle, especially around the wheels.  
When the tire pressure sensor batteries  
are exhausted.  
When using a wheel with no tire  
pressure sensor installed.  
near the vehicle using the same radio  
frequency as that of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
When a metallic device such as a  
non-genuine navigation system is  
equipped near the center of the  
dashboard, which may block radio  
signals from the tire pressure sensor to  
the receiver unit.  
When using tires with steel wire  
reinforcement in the sidewalls.  
When using tire chains.  
4-277  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the  
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h  
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire  
pressure sensor ID signal code will be  
registered automatically.  
Tires and Wheels  
▼
CAUTION  
When inspecting or adjusting the tire air  
pressures, do not apply excessive force to  
the stem part of the wheel unit. The stem  
part could be damaged.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is driven within about 15  
minutes of changing tires, the tire pressure  
monitoring system warning light will flash  
because the sensor ID signal code would  
not have been registered. If this happens,  
park the vehicle for about 15 minutes,  
after which the sensor ID signal code will  
register upon driving the vehicle for 10  
minutes.  
Changing tires and wheels  
The following procedure allows the TPMS  
to recognize a tire pressure sensor's unique  
ID signal code whenever tires or wheels  
are changed, such as changing to and from  
winter tires.  
NOTE  
Replacing tires and wheels  
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID  
signal code. The signal code must be  
registered with the TPMS before it can  
work. The easiest way to do it is to have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, change your  
tire and complete ID signal code  
registration.  
CAUTION  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or the tire  
pressure sensors may be damaged.  
The wheels equipped on your Mazda are  
specially designed for installation of the  
tire pressure sensors. Do not use  
non-genuine wheels, otherwise it may  
not be possible to install the tire pressure  
sensors.  
When having tires changed at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer  
When an Authorized Mazda Dealer,  
changes your vehicle's tires, they will  
complete the tire pressure sensor ID signal  
code registration.  
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors  
installed whenever tires or wheels are  
replaced.  
When changing tires yourself  
If you or someone else changes tires, you  
or someone else can also undertake the  
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID  
signal code registration.  
1. After tires have been changed, switch  
the ignition ON, then back to ACC or  
OFF.  
When having a tire or wheel or both  
replaced, the following types of tire  
pressure sensor installations are possible.  
The tire pressure sensor is removed  
from the old wheel and installed to the  
new one.  
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.  
4-278  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
The same tire pressure sensor is used  
with the same wheel. Only the tire is  
replaced.  
A new tire pressure sensor is installed to  
a new wheel.  
NOTE  
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code  
must be registered when a new tire  
pressure sensor is purchased. For  
purchase of a tire pressure sensor and  
registration of the tire pressure sensor  
ID signal code, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
When reinstalling a previously removed  
tire pressure sensor to a wheel, replace  
the grommet (seal between valve body/  
sensor and wheel) for the tire pressure  
sensor.  
4-279  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))*  
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.  
WARNING  
Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions by  
looking directly with your eyes:  
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an accident  
or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device when  
reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear view  
monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in injury or vehicle  
damage or both.  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.  
The liftgate is not fully closed.  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be  
dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming the surrounding conditions  
of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding  
conditions by looking directly with your eyes.  
Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may deviate.  
Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.  
The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic solvents,  
wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on the cover, wipe off  
with a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera cover forcefully with an abrasive or hard brush. The camera cover or  
lens may be scratched which might affect the images.  
NOTE  
If water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it  
cannot be wiped off, use a mild detergent.  
If the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view  
monitor may not operate correctly.  
When replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could  
result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.  
*Some models.  
4-280  
 
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of the  
rear view parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
If “No camera signal.” is indicated in the display, there could be a problem with the  
camera. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Rear View Parking Camera Location  
▼
Rear view parking camera  
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display  
▼
Shift the selector lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear  
view monitor display.  
NOTE  
When the selector lever is shifted from R to another selector lever position, the screen  
returns to the previous display.  
4-281  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Displayable Range on the Screen  
▼
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.  
(Screen display)  
Garnish  
Bumper  
(Actual view)  
Object  
NOTE  
The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.  
The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends  
cannot be displayed.  
The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance  
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.  
Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not  
install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating  
parts or parts made of reflective material.  
It may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
In darkened areas.  
When the temperature around the lens is high/low.  
When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.  
When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.  
When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.  
Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.  
4-282  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Viewing the Display  
▼
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen as a  
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking  
space you are about to back into.  
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.  
a
b
a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)  
These guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.  
b) Distance guide lines.  
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the  
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19.7 in) from the rear bumper. The yellow  
lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39.4 in) and 2.0 m (78 in) from the rear bumper.  
CAUTION  
The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver's turning of the  
steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's rear and the surrounding  
area directly with your eyes while backing up.  
Rear View Monitor Operation  
▼
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on the  
traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies  
depending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and  
steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.  
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.  
NOTE  
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images  
(mirror images).  
1. Shift the selector lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.  
4-283  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.  
(Display condition)  
(Vehicle condition)  
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that  
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the  
left and right are roughly equal.  
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to  
the left and right sides of the parking space.  
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the  
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle in  
the best possible position.  
(Display condition)  
(Vehicle condition)  
6. When the selector lever is shifted from R to another selector lever position, the screen  
returns to the previous display.  
4-284  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
NOTE  
If the parking space has division lines, straighten the wheels when the vehicle width  
guide lines are parallel to them.  
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated  
below, and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of  
the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen, the back end  
and distance guide lines may appear aligned in the monitor, but they may not  
actually be aligned on the ground.  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space,  
the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear aligned in the monitor, but  
they may not actually be aligned on the ground.  
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image  
▼
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in  
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may cause  
a variance in distance perspective.  
4-285  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load  
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the  
actual distance.  
Variance  
Object  
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle  
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the  
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.  
Appears  
farther than  
actual  
Appears  
closer than  
actual  
A
B
B
A
distance  
distance  
Object on screen  
Object at actual position  
Object on screen  
Object at actual  
position  
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.  
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.  
4-286  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear  
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the  
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.  
(Screen display)  
(Actual condition)  
A
A
B
C
C B  
(Actual distance) B>C=A  
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C  
Picture Quality Adjustment  
▼
WARNING  
Always adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is stopped:  
Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle. Adjusting  
the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast, color, and tint while  
driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the vehicle operation  
which could lead to an accident.  
Picture quality adjustment must be done while the selector lever is in reverse (R).  
There are four settings which can be adjusted including, brightness, contrast, tint, and color.  
When adjusting, pay sufficient attention to the vehicle surroundings.  
1. Select the  
icon on the screen to display the tabs.  
2. Select the desired tab item.  
3. Adjust the brightness, contrast, tint, and color using the slider.  
If you need to reset, press the reset button.  
4. Select the  
icon on the screen to close the tab.  
4-287  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))*  
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.  
WARNING  
Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions by  
looking directly with your eyes:  
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an accident  
or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device when  
reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear view  
monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in injury or vehicle  
damage or both.  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.  
The liftgate is not fully closed.  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be  
dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming the surrounding conditions  
of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding  
conditions by looking directly with your eyes.  
Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may deviate.  
Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.  
The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic solvents,  
wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on the cover, wipe off  
with a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera cover forcefully with an abrasive or hard brush. The camera cover or  
lens may be scratched which might affect the images.  
NOTE  
If water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it  
cannot be wiped off, use a mild detergent.  
If the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view  
monitor may not operate correctly.  
When replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could  
result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.  
*Some models.  
4-288  
 
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of the  
rear view parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
If “No camera signal.” is indicated in the display, there could be a problem with the  
camera. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Rear View Parking Camera Location  
▼
Rear view parking camera  
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display  
▼
Shift the selector lever to reverse (R) position with the ignition switched ON to switch the  
display to the rear view monitor display.  
NOTE  
When the selector lever is shifted from reverse (R) position to another selector lever  
position, the screen returns to the previous display.  
4-289  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Displayable Range on the Screen  
▼
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.  
(Screen display)  
Bumper  
(Actual view)  
Object  
NOTE  
The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.  
If the camera lens is touched or there is any dirt on it, it could affect the screen image.  
Wipe the lens using a soft cloth.  
The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends  
cannot be displayed.  
The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance  
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.  
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images  
(mirror images).  
Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not  
install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating  
parts or parts made of reflective material.  
It may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
In darkened areas.  
When the temperature around the lens is high/low.  
When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.  
4-290  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.  
When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.  
The surroundings are illuminated by vehicle lights, fluorescent lights, or LED lights  
(display may flicker).  
Extremely small dark or white dots appear on the screen (dots may flicker).  
Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.  
Viewing the Display  
▼
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle are displayed on the screen as a  
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking  
space you are about to back into.  
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.  
a) Vehicle width guide lines  
Guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.  
b) Distance guide lines  
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the  
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the rear bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39 in) and 2.0 m (78 in) from the rear  
bumper.  
Rear View Monitor Operation  
▼
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on the  
traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies  
depending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and  
steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.  
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.  
NOTE  
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images  
(mirror images).  
4-291  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
1. Shift the selector lever to reverse (R) position to switch the display to the rear view  
monitor display.  
2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.  
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that  
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the  
left and right are roughly equal.  
(Display condition)  
(Vehicle condition)  
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to  
the left and right sides of the parking space.  
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the  
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle in  
4-292  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the  
vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
(Display condition)  
(Vehicle condition)  
6. When the selector lever is shifted from reverse (R) position to another selector lever  
position, the screen returns to the previous display.  
NOTE  
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below,  
and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle  
and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen, the back end and  
distance guide lines may appear aligned in the monitor, but they may not actually be  
aligned on the ground.  
4-293  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the  
division line and the vehicle width guide line appear aligned in the monitor, but they may  
not actually be aligned on the ground.  
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image  
▼
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in  
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may cause  
a variance in distance perspective.  
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load  
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the  
actual distance.  
Variance  
Object  
4-294  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle  
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the  
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.  
Appears  
farther than  
actual  
Appears  
closer than  
actual  
A
B
B
A
distance  
distance  
Object on screen  
Object at actual position  
Object on screen  
Object at actual  
position  
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.  
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.  
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear  
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the  
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.  
(Screen display)  
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C  
(Actual view)  
A
C B  
(Actual distance) B>C=A  
4-295  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))*  
The parking sensors use ultrasonic sensors which detect obstructions around the vehicle  
when the vehicle is driven at low speeds, such as during garage or parallel parking, and a  
buzzer sound and detection indicator notify the driver of the approximate distance from the  
vehicle to the surrounding obstruction.  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor  
Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Front ultrasonic sensor  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the parking sensor system and be sure to confirm the safety around  
your vehicle visually when driving:  
This system can assist the driver in operating the vehicle in the forward and backward  
directions while parking. The detection ranges of the sensors are limited, therefore, driving the  
vehicle while relying only on the system may cause an accident. Always confirm the safety  
around your vehicle visually when driving.  
NOTE  
Do not install any accessories within the detection ranges of the sensors. It may affect the  
system operation.  
Depending on the type of obstruction and the surrounding conditions, the detection range  
of a sensor may narrow, or the sensors may not be able to detect obstructions.  
The system may not operate normally under the following conditions:  
Mud, ice, or snow is adhering to the sensor area (Returns to normal operation when  
removed).  
The sensor area is frozen (Returns to normal operation when the ice is thawed).  
The sensor is covered by a hand.  
The sensor is excessively shocked.  
The vehicle is excessively tilted.  
Under extremely hot or cold weather conditions.  
*Some models.  
4-296  
 
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
The vehicle is driven on bumps, inclines, gravel, or grass covered roads.  
Anything which generates ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as another vehicle's  
horn, the engine sound of a motorcycle, the air brake sound of a large-sized vehicle, or  
another vehicle's sensors.  
The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or in road conditions causing water-splash.  
A commercially-available fender pole or an antenna for a radio transmitter is installed  
to the vehicle.  
The vehicle is moving towards a tall or square curbstone.  
An obstruction is too close to the sensor.  
Obstructions under the bumper may not be detected. Obstructions that are lower than the  
bumper or thin which may have been initially detected may no longer be detected as the  
vehicle approaches more closely to the obstruction.  
The following types of obstructions may not be detected:  
Thin objects such as wire or rope  
Things which absorb sonic waves easily such as cotton or snow  
Angular shaped objects  
Very tall objects, and those which are wide at the top  
Small, short objects  
Always have the system inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is applied  
to the bumpers, even in a minor accident. If the sensors are deviated, they cannot detect  
obstructions.  
The system may have a malfunction if the beep does not operate or the indicator light  
does not illuminate when the parking sensor switch is turned on. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The system may have a malfunction if the beep sound which indicates a system  
malfunction is heard and the indicator light flashes. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The beeper which indicates a system malfunction may not be heard if the ambient  
temperature is extremely cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to the sensor area. Remove  
any foreign material from the sensor area.  
When installing a trailer hitch, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
4-297  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Sensor Detection Range  
▼
The sensors detect obstructions within the following range.  
A: About 55 cm (About 21.6 in)  
B: About 55 cm (About 21.6 in)  
C: About 100 cm (About 39.3 in)  
D: About 150 cm (About 59.0 in)  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Front ultrasonic sensor detection range  
B
A
D
C
Rear ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Viewing distance display  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Display  
Front ultrasonic sensor/Front ul‐ Rear ultrasonic sensor/Rear ultra‐  
trasonic corner sensor  
sonic corner sensor  
Green  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 100―60 cm (39.3―23.6  
in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 150―60 cm (59.0―23.6  
in)  
4-298  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Display  
Front ultrasonic sensor/Front ul‐ Rear ultrasonic sensor/Rear ultra‐  
trasonic corner sensor  
sonic corner sensor  
Yellow  
Amber  
Red  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7 in) Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor: Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in) Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in)  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7 in) Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor: Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in) Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
4-299  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Parking Sensor System Operation  
▼
When the parking sensor switch is pressed with the ignition switched ON, the buzzer sounds  
and the indicator light turns on.  
When the ignition is switched ON with the parking sensor activated, the indicator light turns  
on.  
Press the switch again to stop the operation.  
Indicator light  
Operation conditions  
The parking sensor system can be used when all of the following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The parking sensor switch is turned on.  
NOTE  
The detection indicator and buzzer of the front ultrasonic sensors/front corner ultrasonic  
sensors do not operate when the selector lever is in the P position.  
The detection indicator and buzzer sound do not activate when the parking brake is  
applied.  
Obstruction Detection Indication  
▼
The position of a sensor which has detected an obstruction is indicated. The gauge  
illuminates in different areas depending on the distance to an obstruction detected by the  
sensor.  
4-300  
 
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
As the vehicle approaches closer to an obstruction, the zone in the gauge closer to the  
vehicle illuminates.  
Front ultrasonic sensor  
Left front corner  
ultrasonic sensor  
Right front corner  
ultrasonic sensor  
Left rear corner  
ultrasonic sensor  
Right rear corner  
ultrasonic sensor  
Rear ultrasonic sensor  
NOTE  
The detection indicator can switch between display and non-display.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the detection indicator is set to “Display”, even with the 360° view monitor not  
displayed, if a front ultrasonic sensor or a front corner ultrasonic sensor detects an  
obstruction, the 360° view monitor switches automatically to display. When an obstruction  
is no longer detected, the display switches to the display before the obstruction was  
detected. However, while the 360° view monitor is displayed, it continues to display no  
matter if an obstruction is detected or not.  
System problem notification  
If a problem occurs, the driver is notified of the problem by the following indications.  
Detection Indicator  
Solution  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Deal‐  
er as soon as possible.  
Disconnection  
4-301  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Detection Indicator  
Solution  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Deal‐  
er as soon as possible.  
System mal‐  
function  
Foreign matter may be on the sensor area corre‐  
sponding to the obstruction detection indication  
shown. If the system does not recover, have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Deal‐  
er.  
Frost/soiling  
Parking Sensor Warning Beep  
▼
The beeper sounds as follows while the system is operating.  
Front Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Ultrasonic Sensor  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Front ultrasonic sensor Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Approx. 100―60 cm (39.3―23.6 Approx. 150―60 cm (59.0―23.6  
Distance detec‐  
*1  
Beeper sound  
tion area  
in)  
in)  
Slow intermittent  
sound  
Farthest distance  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7  
in)  
in)  
Medium intermit‐  
tent sound  
Far distance  
4-302  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Distance detec‐  
*1  
Beeper sound  
tion area  
Front ultrasonic sensor  
Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7  
in)  
in)  
Fast intermittent  
sound  
Middle distance  
Close distance  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Continuous sound  
*
1
The rate at which the intermittent sound beeps increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.  
Front Corner Ultrasonic Sensor, Rear Corner Ultrasonic Sensor  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
*1  
Distance detection area  
Beeper sound  
Front corner ultrasonic/Rear corner ultrasonic  
sensor  
Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in)  
Far distance  
Medium intermittent sound  
Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in)  
Middle distance  
Fast intermittent sound  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
Close distance  
Continuous sound  
*
1
The rate at which the intermittent sound beeps increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.  
4-303  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type A))  
NOTE  
If an obstruction is detected in a zone for 6 seconds or more, the beep sound is stopped  
(except for the close-distance zone). If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the  
corresponding beep sound is heard.  
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated  
▼
The system notifies the driver of an abnormality by activating the beep sound and the  
indicator light.  
Indicator/Beep  
How to check  
The indicator light flashes when  
the parking sensor switch is  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected at an Author‐  
pressed at a vehicle speed of 10 ized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
km/h (6 mph) or less.  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected at an Author‐  
ized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
The beep sound is not heard.  
The intermittent sound of the  
buzzer is heard 5 times.  
Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system does not re‐  
cover, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A certain obstruction detection  
indicator is continuously dis‐  
played.  
Refer to Obstruction Detection Indication on page 4-300.  
4-304  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))*  
The parking sensors use ultrasonic sensors which detect obstructions around the vehicle  
when the vehicle is driven at low speeds, such as during garage or parallel parking, and a  
buzzer sound and detection indicator notify the driver of the approximate distance from the  
vehicle to the surrounding obstruction.  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor  
Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Front ultrasonic sensor  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the parking sensor system and be sure to confirm the safety around  
your vehicle visually when driving:  
This system can assist the driver in operating the vehicle in the forward and backward  
directions while parking. The detection ranges of the sensors are limited, therefore, driving the  
vehicle while relying only on the system may cause an accident. Always confirm the safety  
around your vehicle visually when driving.  
NOTE  
Do not install any accessories within the detection ranges of the sensors. It may affect the  
system operation.  
Depending on the type of obstruction and the surrounding conditions, the detection range  
of a sensor may narrow, or the sensors may not be able to detect obstructions.  
The system may not operate normally under the following conditions:  
Mud, ice, or snow is adhering to the sensor area (Returns to normal operation when  
removed).  
The sensor area is frozen (Returns to normal operation when the ice is thawed).  
The sensor is covered by a hand.  
The sensor is excessively shocked.  
The vehicle is excessively tilted.  
Under extremely hot or cold weather conditions.  
*Some models.  
4-305  
 
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
The vehicle is driven on bumps, inclines, gravel, or grass covered roads.  
Anything which generates ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as another vehicle's  
horn, the engine sound of a motorcycle, the air brake sound of a large-sized vehicle, or  
another vehicle's sensors.  
The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or in road conditions causing water-splash.  
A commercially-available fender pole or an antenna for a radio transmitter is installed  
to the vehicle.  
The vehicle is moving towards a tall or square curbstone.  
An obstruction is too close to the sensor.  
Obstructions under the bumper may not be detected. Obstructions that are lower than the  
bumper or thin which may have been initially detected may no longer be detected as the  
vehicle approaches more closely to the obstruction.  
The following types of obstructions may not be detected:  
Thin objects such as wire or rope  
Things which absorb sonic waves easily such as cotton or snow  
Angular shaped objects  
Very tall objects, and those which are wide at the top  
Small, short objects  
Always have the system inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is applied  
to the bumpers, even in a minor accident. If the sensors are deviated, they cannot detect  
obstructions.  
The system may have a malfunction if the beep does not operate or the indicator light  
does not illuminate when the parking sensor switch is turned on. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The system may have a malfunction if the beep sound which indicates a system  
malfunction is heard and the indicator light flashes. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The beeper which indicates a system malfunction may not be heard if the ambient  
temperature is extremely cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to the sensor area. Remove  
any foreign material from the sensor area.  
When installing a trailer hitch, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
4-306  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Sensor Detection Range  
▼
The sensors detect obstructions within the following range.  
A: About 55 cm (About 21.6 in)  
B: About 55 cm (About 21.6 in)  
C: About 100 cm (About 39.3 in)  
D: About 150 cm (About 59.0 in)  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Front ultrasonic sensor detection range  
B
A
D
C
Rear ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor detection range  
Viewing distance display  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Display  
Front ultrasonic sensor/Front cor‐ Rear ultrasonic sensor/Rear cor‐  
ner ultrasonic sensor  
ner ultrasonic sensor  
Green  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 100―60 cm (39.3―23.6  
in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 150―60 cm (59.0―23.6  
in)  
4-307  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Display  
Front ultrasonic sensor/Front cor‐ Rear ultrasonic sensor/Rear cor‐  
ner ultrasonic sensor  
ner ultrasonic sensor  
Yellow  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7 in) Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor: Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in) Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in)  
Amber  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7 in) Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor: Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in) Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Red  
Front ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
Rear ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Rear corner ultrasonic sensor:  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
4-308  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Parking Sensor System Operation  
▼
When the parking sensor switch is pressed with the ignition switched ON, the buzzer sounds  
and the indicator light turns on.  
When the ignition is switched ON with the parking sensor activated, the indicator light turns  
on.  
Press the switch again to stop the operation.  
Indicator light  
Operation conditions  
The parking sensor system can be used when all of the following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The parking sensor switch is turned on.  
NOTE  
The detection indicator and buzzer of the front sensors/front corner sensors do not  
operate when the selector lever is in the P position.  
The detection indicator and buzzer sound do not activate when the parking brake is  
applied.  
Obstruction Detection Indication  
▼
The position of a sensor which has detected an obstruction is indicated. The gauge  
illuminates in different areas depending on the distance to an obstruction detected by the  
sensor.  
4-309  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
As the vehicle approaches closer to an obstruction, the zone in the gauge closer to the  
vehicle illuminates.  
Front ultrasonic sensor gauge  
Right front corner  
ultrasonic sensor gauge  
Left front corner  
ultrasonic sensor gauge  
Left rear corner  
Right rear corner  
ultrasonic sensor gauge  
ultrasonic sensor gauge  
Rear sensor ultrasonic gauge  
NOTE  
The detection indicator can be switched between display and non-display and the buzzer  
volume can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the detection indicator is set to “Display”, even with the 360° view monitor not  
displayed, if a front ultrasonic sensor or a front corner ultrasonic sensor detects an  
obstruction, the 360° view monitor switches automatically to display. When an obstruction  
is no longer detected, the display switches to the display before the obstruction was  
detected. However, while the 360° view monitor is displayed, it continues to display no  
matter if an obstruction is detected or not.  
System problem notification  
The indication displays if the system has a malfunction.  
Check the reason for the indication displaying on the center display or multi-information  
display.  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on page 7-22.  
4-310  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Parking Sensor Warning Beep  
▼
The beeper sounds as follows while the system is operating.  
Front ultrasonic sensor, Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
Front ultrasonic sensor Rear ultrasonic sensor  
Approx. 100―60 cm (39.3―23.6 Approx. 150―60 cm (59.0―23.6  
Distance Detec‐  
*1  
Beeper sound  
tion area  
in)  
in)  
Slow intermittent  
sound  
Farthest distance  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7  
Approx. 60―45 cm (23.6―17.7  
in)  
in)  
Medium intermit‐  
tent sound  
Far distance  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7  
Approx. 45―35 cm (17.7―13.7  
in)  
in)  
Fast intermittent  
sound  
Middle distance  
Close distance  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Within approx. 35 cm (13.7 in)  
Continuous sound  
*
1
The rate at which the intermittent sound beeps increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.  
4-311  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor, Rear corner ultrasonic sensor  
Distance between vehicle and obstruction  
*1  
Distance Detection area  
Beeper sound  
Front corner ultrasonic sensor/Rear corner ultra‐  
sonic sensor  
Approx. 55―38 cm (21.6―14.9 in)  
Far distance  
Medium intermittent sound  
Approx. 38―25 cm (14.9―9.8 in)  
Middle distance  
Fast intermittent sound  
Within approx. 25 cm (9.8 in)  
Close distance  
Continuous sound  
*
1
The rate at which the intermittent sound beeps increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.  
NOTE  
If an obstruction is detected in a zone for 6 seconds or more, the beep sound is stopped  
(except for the close-distance zone). If the same obstruction is detected in another zone,  
the corresponding beep sound is heard.  
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated  
▼
The system notifies the driver of an abnormality by activating the beep sound and the  
indicator light.  
Indicator/Beep  
How to check  
The indicator light flashes when  
the parking sensor switch is  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected at an Author‐  
pressed at a vehicle speed of 10 ized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
km/h (6 mph) or less.  
The system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected at an Author‐  
ized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
The beep sound is not heard.  
4-312  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System (Mazda Connect (Type B))  
Indicator/Beep  
How to check  
The intermittent sound of the  
buzzer is heard 5 times.  
Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system does not re‐  
cover, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A certain obstruction detection  
indicator is continuously dis‐  
played.  
Refer to Obstruction Detection Indication on page 4-300.  
4-313  
MEMO  
4-314  
Interior Features  
5
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning  
system and audio system.  
Climate Control System....................5-2  
Operating Tips.............................. 5-2  
Vent Operation..............................5-3  
Manual Type.................................5-5  
Fully Automatic Type...................5-9  
Mazda Connect Basic  
Operations...................................5-37  
Connected Service (If  
applicable).................................. 5-53  
Interior Equipment......................... 5-55  
Sunvisors.................................... 5-55  
Interior Lights.............................5-56  
Accessory Sockets......................5-60  
USB Power Outlet*.................... 5-62  
Wireless Charger (Qi)*............... 5-63  
Cup Holder................................. 5-66  
Bottle Holder.............................. 5-67  
Storage Compartments............... 5-68  
Mazda Connect (Mazda Connect  
(Type A))...........................................5-14  
What is Mazda Connect ?...........5-14  
Mazda Connect Basic  
Operations...................................5-17  
Mazda Connect (Mazda Connect  
(Type B))...........................................5-33  
What is Mazda Connect ?...........5-33  
*Some models.  
5-1  

Popular Manuals

2023 Ford Focus 4 Door
2017-2023 Honda Civic 4 Door
2023 Toyota Corolla 4 Door
2023 Ford Fiesta 4 Door
2023 Honda CR-V SUV
2023 Volkswagen Golf 4 Door
2023 Honda Accord 4 Door
2022 BMW 5 Series 4 Door
2024 Audi A3 4 Door
2024 BMW X5 SUV
2022 BMW 3 Series 4 Door
2023 Kia Sorento SUV
2022 Mercedes E Class 4 Door
2023 Mercedes C Class 4 Door
2023 Volkswagen Tiguan 4 Door
2024 Subaru Forester SUV
2023 Mazda Cx-5 SUV
2023 Hyundai Santa Fe SUV
2020 Nissan Qashqai SUV
2020 Ford Kuga SUV
2020 Kia Sportage SUV
2020 Audi Q3 SUV
2020 Audi Q5 SUV
2020 Land Rover Evoque SUV
2020 Nissan Juke SUV
2020 Hyundai Tucson SUV
2020 Peugeot 3008 SUV
2020 Volvo XC40 SUV
2020 Land Rover Discovery Sport SUV
2020 Toyota C-Hr SUV
2020 Vauxhall Corsa 4 Door